| blob | 62a391a9264353dfb14ecd1f3422dd7a014ccb5f |
1 *eval.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Sep 30
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
7 Expression evaluation *expression* *expr* *E15* *eval*
9 Using expressions is introduced in chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
11 Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time. If this has been
12 done, the features in this document are not available. See |+eval| and
13 |no-eval-feature|.
15 1. Variables |variables|
16 1.1 Variable types
17 1.2 Function references |Funcref|
18 1.3 Lists |Lists|
19 1.4 Dictionaries |Dictionaries|
20 1.5 More about variables |more-variables|
21 2. Expression syntax |expression-syntax|
22 3. Internal variable |internal-variables|
23 4. Builtin Functions |functions|
24 5. Defining functions |user-functions|
25 6. Curly braces names |curly-braces-names|
26 7. Commands |expression-commands|
27 8. Exception handling |exception-handling|
28 9. Examples |eval-examples|
29 10. No +eval feature |no-eval-feature|
30 11. The sandbox |eval-sandbox|
31 12. Textlock |textlock|
33 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
35 ==============================================================================
36 1. Variables *variables*
38 1.1 Variable types ~
39 *E712*
40 There are six types of variables:
42 Number A 32 bit signed number. |expr-number| *Number*
43 Examples: -123 0x10 0177
45 Float A floating point number. |floating-point-format| *Float*
46 {only when compiled with the |+float| feature}
47 Examples: 123.456 1.15e-6 -1.1e3
49 String A NUL terminated string of 8-bit unsigned characters (bytes).
50 |expr-string| Examples: "ab\txx\"--" 'x-z''a,c'
52 Funcref A reference to a function |Funcref|.
53 Example: function("strlen")
55 List An ordered sequence of items |List|.
56 Example: [1, 2, ['a', 'b']]
58 Dictionary An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a
59 value. |Dictionary|
60 Example: {'blue': "#0000ff", 'red': "#ff0000"}
62 The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they
63 are used.
65 Conversion from a Number to a String is by making the ASCII representation of
66 the Number. Examples: >
67 Number 123 --> String "123"
68 Number 0 --> String "0"
69 Number -1 --> String "-1"
71 Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits
72 to a number. Hexadecimal "0xf9" and Octal "017" numbers are recognized. If
73 the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero. Examples: >
74 String "456" --> Number 456
75 String "6bar" --> Number 6
76 String "foo" --> Number 0
77 String "0xf1" --> Number 241
78 String "0100" --> Number 64
79 String "-8" --> Number -8
80 String "+8" --> Number 0
82 To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: >
83 :echo "0100" + 0
84 < 64 ~
86 To avoid a leading zero to cause octal conversion, or for using a different
87 base, use |str2nr()|.
89 For boolean operators Numbers are used. Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE.
91 Note that in the command >
92 :if "foo"
93 "foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE. To test for a non-empty string,
94 use strlen(): >
95 :if strlen("foo")
96 < *E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731*
97 List, Dictionary and Funcref types are not automatically converted.
99 *E805* *E806* *E808*
100 When mixing Number and Float the Number is converted to Float. Otherwise
101 there is no automatic conversion of Float. You can use str2float() for String
102 to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number.
104 *E706* *sticky-type-checking*
105 You will get an error if you try to change the type of a variable. You need
106 to |:unlet| it first to avoid this error. String and Number are considered
107 equivalent though, as well are Float and Number. Consider this sequence of
108 commands: >
109 :let l = "string"
110 :let l = 44 " changes type from String to Number
111 :let l = [1, 2, 3] " error! l is still a Number
112 :let l = 4.4 " changes type from Number to Float
113 :let l = "string" " error!
116 1.2 Function references ~
117 *Funcref* *E695* *E718*
118 A Funcref variable is obtained with the |function()| function. It can be used
119 in an expression in the place of a function name, before the parenthesis
120 around the arguments, to invoke the function it refers to. Example: >
122 :let Fn = function("MyFunc")
123 :echo Fn()
124 < *E704* *E705* *E707*
125 A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:", "t:" or "b:". You
126 cannot have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name.
128 A special case is defining a function and directly assigning its Funcref to a
129 Dictionary entry. Example: >
130 :function dict.init() dict
131 : let self.val = 0
132 :endfunction
134 The key of the Dictionary can start with a lower case letter. The actual
135 function name is not used here. Also see |numbered-function|.
137 A Funcref can also be used with the |:call| command: >
138 :call Fn()
139 :call dict.init()
141 The name of the referenced function can be obtained with |string()|. >
142 :let func = string(Fn)
144 You can use |call()| to invoke a Funcref and use a list variable for the
145 arguments: >
146 :let r = call(Fn, mylist)
149 1.3 Lists ~
150 *List* *Lists* *E686*
151 A List is an ordered sequence of items. An item can be of any type. Items
152 can be accessed by their index number. Items can be added and removed at any
153 position in the sequence.
156 List creation ~
157 *E696* *E697*
158 A List is created with a comma separated list of items in square brackets.
159 Examples: >
160 :let mylist = [1, two, 3, "four"]
161 :let emptylist = []
163 An item can be any expression. Using a List for an item creates a
164 List of Lists: >
165 :let nestlist = [[11, 12], [21, 22], [31, 32]]
167 An extra comma after the last item is ignored.
170 List index ~
171 *list-index* *E684*
172 An item in the List can be accessed by putting the index in square brackets
173 after the List. Indexes are zero-based, thus the first item has index zero. >
174 :let item = mylist[0] " get the first item: 1
175 :let item = mylist[2] " get the third item: 3
177 When the resulting item is a list this can be repeated: >
178 :let item = nestlist[0][1] " get the first list, second item: 12
179 <
180 A negative index is counted from the end. Index -1 refers to the last item in
181 the List, -2 to the last but one item, etc. >
182 :let last = mylist[-1] " get the last item: "four"
184 To avoid an error for an invalid index use the |get()| function. When an item
185 is not available it returns zero or the default value you specify: >
186 :echo get(mylist, idx)
187 :echo get(mylist, idx, "NONE")
190 List concatenation ~
192 Two lists can be concatenated with the "+" operator: >
193 :let longlist = mylist + [5, 6]
194 :let mylist += [7, 8]
196 To prepend or append an item turn the item into a list by putting [] around
197 it. To change a list in-place see |list-modification| below.
200 Sublist ~
202 A part of the List can be obtained by specifying the first and last index,
203 separated by a colon in square brackets: >
204 :let shortlist = mylist[2:-1] " get List [3, "four"]
206 Omitting the first index is similar to zero. Omitting the last index is
207 similar to -1. >
208 :let endlist = mylist[2:] " from item 2 to the end: [3, "four"]
209 :let shortlist = mylist[2:2] " List with one item: [3]
210 :let otherlist = mylist[:] " make a copy of the List
212 If the first index is beyond the last item of the List or the second item is
213 before the first item, the result is an empty list. There is no error
214 message.
216 If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list the
217 length minus one is used: >
218 :let mylist = [0, 1, 2, 3]
219 :echo mylist[2:8] " result: [2, 3]
221 NOTE: mylist[s:e] means using the variable "s:e" as index. Watch out for
222 using a single letter variable before the ":". Insert a space when needed:
223 mylist[s : e].
226 List identity ~
227 *list-identity*
228 When variable "aa" is a list and you assign it to another variable "bb", both
229 variables refer to the same list. Thus changing the list "aa" will also
230 change "bb": >
231 :let aa = [1, 2, 3]
232 :let bb = aa
233 :call add(aa, 4)
234 :echo bb
235 < [1, 2, 3, 4]
237 Making a copy of a list is done with the |copy()| function. Using [:] also
238 works, as explained above. This creates a shallow copy of the list: Changing
239 a list item in the list will also change the item in the copied list: >
240 :let aa = [[1, 'a'], 2, 3]
241 :let bb = copy(aa)
242 :call add(aa, 4)
243 :let aa[0][1] = 'aaa'
244 :echo aa
245 < [[1, aaa], 2, 3, 4] >
246 :echo bb
247 < [[1, aaa], 2, 3]
249 To make a completely independent list use |deepcopy()|. This also makes a
250 copy of the values in the list, recursively. Up to a hundred levels deep.
252 The operator "is" can be used to check if two variables refer to the same
253 List. "isnot" does the opposite. In contrast "==" compares if two lists have
254 the same value. >
255 :let alist = [1, 2, 3]
256 :let blist = [1, 2, 3]
257 :echo alist is blist
258 < 0 >
259 :echo alist == blist
260 < 1
262 Note about comparing lists: Two lists are considered equal if they have the
263 same length and all items compare equal, as with using "==". There is one
264 exception: When comparing a number with a string they are considered
265 different. There is no automatic type conversion, as with using "==" on
266 variables. Example: >
267 echo 4 == "4"
268 < 1 >
269 echo [4] == ["4"]
270 < 0
272 Thus comparing Lists is more strict than comparing numbers and strings. You
273 can compare simple values this way too by putting them in a list: >
275 :let a = 5
276 :let b = "5"
277 :echo a == b
278 < 1 >
279 :echo [a] == [b]
280 < 0
283 List unpack ~
285 To unpack the items in a list to individual variables, put the variables in
286 square brackets, like list items: >
287 :let [var1, var2] = mylist
289 When the number of variables does not match the number of items in the list
290 this produces an error. To handle any extra items from the list append ";"
291 and a variable name: >
292 :let [var1, var2; rest] = mylist
294 This works like: >
295 :let var1 = mylist[0]
296 :let var2 = mylist[1]
297 :let rest = mylist[2:]
299 Except that there is no error if there are only two items. "rest" will be an
300 empty list then.
303 List modification ~
304 *list-modification*
305 To change a specific item of a list use |:let| this way: >
306 :let list[4] = "four"
307 :let listlist[0][3] = item
309 To change part of a list you can specify the first and last item to be
310 modified. The value must at least have the number of items in the range: >
311 :let list[3:5] = [3, 4, 5]
313 Adding and removing items from a list is done with functions. Here are a few
314 examples: >
315 :call insert(list, 'a') " prepend item 'a'
316 :call insert(list, 'a', 3) " insert item 'a' before list[3]
317 :call add(list, "new") " append String item
318 :call add(list, [1, 2]) " append a List as one new item
319 :call extend(list, [1, 2]) " extend the list with two more items
320 :let i = remove(list, 3) " remove item 3
321 :unlet list[3] " idem
322 :let l = remove(list, 3, -1) " remove items 3 to last item
323 :unlet list[3 : ] " idem
324 :call filter(list, 'v:val !~ "x"') " remove items with an 'x'
326 Changing the order of items in a list: >
327 :call sort(list) " sort a list alphabetically
328 :call reverse(list) " reverse the order of items
331 For loop ~
333 The |:for| loop executes commands for each item in a list. A variable is set
334 to each item in the list in sequence. Example: >
335 :for item in mylist
336 : call Doit(item)
337 :endfor
339 This works like: >
340 :let index = 0
341 :while index < len(mylist)
342 : let item = mylist[index]
343 : :call Doit(item)
344 : let index = index + 1
345 :endwhile
347 Note that all items in the list should be of the same type, otherwise this
348 results in error |E706|. To avoid this |:unlet| the variable at the end of
349 the loop.
351 If all you want to do is modify each item in the list then the |map()|
352 function will be a simpler method than a for loop.
354 Just like the |:let| command, |:for| also accepts a list of variables. This
355 requires the argument to be a list of lists. >
356 :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 8], [3, 0]]
357 : call Doit(lnum, col)
358 :endfor
360 This works like a |:let| command is done for each list item. Again, the types
361 must remain the same to avoid an error.
363 It is also possible to put remaining items in a List variable: >
364 :for [i, j; rest] in listlist
365 : call Doit(i, j)
366 : if !empty(rest)
367 : echo "remainder: " . string(rest)
368 : endif
369 :endfor
372 List functions ~
373 *E714*
374 Functions that are useful with a List: >
375 :let r = call(funcname, list) " call a function with an argument list
376 :if empty(list) " check if list is empty
377 :let l = len(list) " number of items in list
378 :let big = max(list) " maximum value in list
379 :let small = min(list) " minimum value in list
380 :let xs = count(list, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in list
381 :let i = index(list, 'x') " index of first 'x' in list
382 :let lines = getline(1, 10) " get ten text lines from buffer
383 :call append('$', lines) " append text lines in buffer
384 :let list = split("a b c") " create list from items in a string
385 :let string = join(list, ', ') " create string from list items
386 :let s = string(list) " String representation of list
387 :call map(list, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item
389 Don't forget that a combination of features can make things simple. For
390 example, to add up all the numbers in a list: >
391 :exe 'let sum = ' . join(nrlist, '+')
394 1.4 Dictionaries ~
395 *Dictionaries* *Dictionary*
396 A Dictionary is an associative array: Each entry has a key and a value. The
397 entry can be located with the key. The entries are stored without a specific
398 ordering.
401 Dictionary creation ~
402 *E720* *E721* *E722* *E723*
403 A Dictionary is created with a comma separated list of entries in curly
404 braces. Each entry has a key and a value, separated by a colon. Each key can
405 only appear once. Examples: >
406 :let mydict = {1: 'one', 2: 'two', 3: 'three'}
407 :let emptydict = {}
408 < *E713* *E716* *E717*
409 A key is always a String. You can use a Number, it will be converted to a
410 String automatically. Thus the String '4' and the number 4 will find the same
411 entry. Note that the String '04' and the Number 04 are different, since the
412 Number will be converted to the String '4'.
414 A value can be any expression. Using a Dictionary for a value creates a
415 nested Dictionary: >
416 :let nestdict = {1: {11: 'a', 12: 'b'}, 2: {21: 'c'}}
418 An extra comma after the last entry is ignored.
421 Accessing entries ~
423 The normal way to access an entry is by putting the key in square brackets: >
424 :let val = mydict["one"]
425 :let mydict["four"] = 4
427 You can add new entries to an existing Dictionary this way, unlike Lists.
429 For keys that consist entirely of letters, digits and underscore the following
430 form can be used |expr-entry|: >
431 :let val = mydict.one
432 :let mydict.four = 4
434 Since an entry can be any type, also a List and a Dictionary, the indexing and
435 key lookup can be repeated: >
436 :echo dict.key[idx].key
439 Dictionary to List conversion ~
441 You may want to loop over the entries in a dictionary. For this you need to
442 turn the Dictionary into a List and pass it to |:for|.
444 Most often you want to loop over the keys, using the |keys()| function: >
445 :for key in keys(mydict)
446 : echo key . ': ' . mydict[key]
447 :endfor
449 The List of keys is unsorted. You may want to sort them first: >
450 :for key in sort(keys(mydict))
452 To loop over the values use the |values()| function: >
453 :for v in values(mydict)
454 : echo "value: " . v
455 :endfor
457 If you want both the key and the value use the |items()| function. It returns
458 a List in which each item is a List with two items, the key and the value: >
459 :for [key, value] in items(mydict)
460 : echo key . ': ' . value
461 :endfor
464 Dictionary identity ~
465 *dict-identity*
466 Just like Lists you need to use |copy()| and |deepcopy()| to make a copy of a
467 Dictionary. Otherwise, assignment results in referring to the same
468 Dictionary: >
469 :let onedict = {'a': 1, 'b': 2}
470 :let adict = onedict
471 :let adict['a'] = 11
472 :echo onedict['a']
473 11
475 Two Dictionaries compare equal if all the key-value pairs compare equal. For
476 more info see |list-identity|.
479 Dictionary modification ~
480 *dict-modification*
481 To change an already existing entry of a Dictionary, or to add a new entry,
482 use |:let| this way: >
483 :let dict[4] = "four"
484 :let dict['one'] = item
486 Removing an entry from a Dictionary is done with |remove()| or |:unlet|.
487 Three ways to remove the entry with key "aaa" from dict: >
488 :let i = remove(dict, 'aaa')
489 :unlet dict.aaa
490 :unlet dict['aaa']
492 Merging a Dictionary with another is done with |extend()|: >
493 :call extend(adict, bdict)
494 This extends adict with all entries from bdict. Duplicate keys cause entries
495 in adict to be overwritten. An optional third argument can change this.
496 Note that the order of entries in a Dictionary is irrelevant, thus don't
497 expect ":echo adict" to show the items from bdict after the older entries in
498 adict.
500 Weeding out entries from a Dictionary can be done with |filter()|: >
501 :call filter(dict, 'v:val =~ "x"')
502 This removes all entries from "dict" with a value not matching 'x'.
505 Dictionary function ~
506 *Dictionary-function* *self* *E725*
507 When a function is defined with the "dict" attribute it can be used in a
508 special way with a dictionary. Example: >
509 :function Mylen() dict
510 : return len(self.data)
511 :endfunction
512 :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3], 'len': function("Mylen")}
513 :echo mydict.len()
515 This is like a method in object oriented programming. The entry in the
516 Dictionary is a |Funcref|. The local variable "self" refers to the dictionary
517 the function was invoked from.
519 It is also possible to add a function without the "dict" attribute as a
520 Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then.
522 *numbered-function* *anonymous-function*
523 To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly
524 assigned to a Dictionary in this way: >
525 :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]}
526 :function mydict.len() dict
527 : return len(self.data)
528 :endfunction
529 :echo mydict.len()
531 The function will then get a number and the value of dict.len is a |Funcref|
532 that references this function. The function can only be used through a
533 |Funcref|. It will automatically be deleted when there is no |Funcref|
534 remaining that refers to it.
536 It is not necessary to use the "dict" attribute for a numbered function.
539 Functions for Dictionaries ~
540 *E715*
541 Functions that can be used with a Dictionary: >
542 :if has_key(dict, 'foo') " TRUE if dict has entry with key "foo"
543 :if empty(dict) " TRUE if dict is empty
544 :let l = len(dict) " number of items in dict
545 :let big = max(dict) " maximum value in dict
546 :let small = min(dict) " minimum value in dict
547 :let xs = count(dict, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in dict
548 :let s = string(dict) " String representation of dict
549 :call map(dict, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item
552 1.5 More about variables ~
553 *more-variables*
554 If you need to know the type of a variable or expression, use the |type()|
555 function.
557 When the '!' flag is included in the 'viminfo' option, global variables that
558 start with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase letter, are
559 stored in the viminfo file |viminfo-file|.
561 When the 'sessionoptions' option contains "global", global variables that
562 start with an uppercase letter and contain at least one lowercase letter are
563 stored in the session file |session-file|.
565 variable name can be stored where ~
566 my_var_6 not
567 My_Var_6 session file
568 MY_VAR_6 viminfo file
571 It's possible to form a variable name with curly braces, see
572 |curly-braces-names|.
574 ==============================================================================
575 2. Expression syntax *expression-syntax*
577 Expression syntax summary, from least to most significant:
579 |expr1| expr2 ? expr1 : expr1 if-then-else
581 |expr2| expr3 || expr3 .. logical OR
583 |expr3| expr4 && expr4 .. logical AND
585 |expr4| expr5 == expr5 equal
586 expr5 != expr5 not equal
587 expr5 > expr5 greater than
588 expr5 >= expr5 greater than or equal
589 expr5 < expr5 smaller than
590 expr5 <= expr5 smaller than or equal
591 expr5 =~ expr5 regexp matches
592 expr5 !~ expr5 regexp doesn't match
594 expr5 ==? expr5 equal, ignoring case
595 expr5 ==# expr5 equal, match case
596 etc. As above, append ? for ignoring case, # for
597 matching case
599 expr5 is expr5 same |List| instance
600 expr5 isnot expr5 different |List| instance
602 |expr5| expr6 + expr6 .. number addition or list concatenation
603 expr6 - expr6 .. number subtraction
604 expr6 . expr6 .. string concatenation
606 |expr6| expr7 * expr7 .. number multiplication
607 expr7 / expr7 .. number division
608 expr7 % expr7 .. number modulo
610 |expr7| ! expr7 logical NOT
611 - expr7 unary minus
612 + expr7 unary plus
615 |expr8| expr8[expr1] byte of a String or item of a |List|
616 expr8[expr1 : expr1] substring of a String or sublist of a |List|
617 expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary|
618 expr8(expr1, ...) function call with |Funcref| variable
620 |expr9| number number constant
621 "string" string constant, backslash is special
622 'string' string constant, ' is doubled
623 [expr1, ...] |List|
624 {expr1: expr1, ...} |Dictionary|
625 &option option value
626 (expr1) nested expression
627 variable internal variable
628 va{ria}ble internal variable with curly braces
629 $VAR environment variable
630 @r contents of register 'r'
631 function(expr1, ...) function call
632 func{ti}on(expr1, ...) function call with curly braces
635 ".." indicates that the operations in this level can be concatenated.
636 Example: >
637 &nu || &list && &shell == "csh"
639 All expressions within one level are parsed from left to right.
642 expr1 *expr1* *E109*
643 -----
645 expr2 ? expr1 : expr1
647 The expression before the '?' is evaluated to a number. If it evaluates to
648 non-zero, the result is the value of the expression between the '?' and ':',
649 otherwise the result is the value of the expression after the ':'.
650 Example: >
651 :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum
653 Since the first expression is an "expr2", it cannot contain another ?:. The
654 other two expressions can, thus allow for recursive use of ?:.
655 Example: >
656 :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum == 1000 ? "last" : lnum
658 To keep this readable, using |line-continuation| is suggested: >
659 :echo lnum == 1
660 :\ ? "top"
661 :\ : lnum == 1000
662 :\ ? "last"
663 :\ : lnum
665 You should always put a space before the ':', otherwise it can be mistaken for
666 use in a variable such as "a:1".
669 expr2 and expr3 *expr2* *expr3*
670 ---------------
672 *expr-barbar* *expr-&&*
673 The "||" and "&&" operators take one argument on each side. The arguments
674 are (converted to) Numbers. The result is:
676 input output ~
677 n1 n2 n1 || n2 n1 && n2 ~
678 zero zero zero zero
679 zero non-zero non-zero zero
680 non-zero zero non-zero zero
681 non-zero non-zero non-zero non-zero
683 The operators can be concatenated, for example: >
685 &nu || &list && &shell == "csh"
687 Note that "&&" takes precedence over "||", so this has the meaning of: >
689 &nu || (&list && &shell == "csh")
691 Once the result is known, the expression "short-circuits", that is, further
692 arguments are not evaluated. This is like what happens in C. For example: >
694 let a = 1
695 echo a || b
697 This is valid even if there is no variable called "b" because "a" is non-zero,
698 so the result must be non-zero. Similarly below: >
700 echo exists("b") && b == "yes"
702 This is valid whether "b" has been defined or not. The second clause will
703 only be evaluated if "b" has been defined.
706 expr4 *expr4*
707 -----
709 expr5 {cmp} expr5
711 Compare two expr5 expressions, resulting in a 0 if it evaluates to false, or 1
712 if it evaluates to true.
714 *expr-==* *expr-!=* *expr->* *expr->=*
715 *expr-<* *expr-<=* *expr-=~* *expr-!~*
716 *expr-==#* *expr-!=#* *expr->#* *expr->=#*
717 *expr-<#* *expr-<=#* *expr-=~#* *expr-!~#*
718 *expr-==?* *expr-!=?* *expr->?* *expr->=?*
719 *expr-<?* *expr-<=?* *expr-=~?* *expr-!~?*
720 *expr-is*
721 use 'ignorecase' match case ignore case ~
722 equal == ==# ==?
723 not equal != !=# !=?
724 greater than > ># >?
725 greater than or equal >= >=# >=?
726 smaller than < <# <?
727 smaller than or equal <= <=# <=?
728 regexp matches =~ =~# =~?
729 regexp doesn't match !~ !~# !~?
730 same instance is
731 different instance isnot
733 Examples:
734 "abc" ==# "Abc" evaluates to 0
735 "abc" ==? "Abc" evaluates to 1
736 "abc" == "Abc" evaluates to 1 if 'ignorecase' is set, 0 otherwise
738 *E691* *E692*
739 A |List| can only be compared with a |List| and only "equal", "not equal" and
740 "is" can be used. This compares the values of the list, recursively.
741 Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values.
743 *E735* *E736*
744 A |Dictionary| can only be compared with a |Dictionary| and only "equal", "not
745 equal" and "is" can be used. This compares the key/values of the |Dictionary|
746 recursively. Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values.
748 *E693* *E694*
749 A |Funcref| can only be compared with a |Funcref| and only "equal" and "not
750 equal" can be used. Case is never ignored.
752 When using "is" or "isnot" with a |List| this checks if the expressions are
753 referring to the same |List| instance. A copy of a |List| is different from
754 the original |List|. When using "is" without a |List| it is equivalent to
755 using "equal", using "isnot" equivalent to using "not equal". Except that a
756 different type means the values are different. "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'"
757 is false.
759 When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number,
760 and the comparison is done on Numbers. This means that "0 == 'x'" is TRUE,
761 because 'x' converted to a Number is zero.
763 When comparing two Strings, this is done with strcmp() or stricmp(). This
764 results in the mathematical difference (comparing byte values), not
765 necessarily the alphabetical difference in the local language.
767 When using the operators with a trailing '#', or the short version and
768 'ignorecase' is off, the comparing is done with strcmp(): case matters.
770 When using the operators with a trailing '?', or the short version and
771 'ignorecase' is set, the comparing is done with stricmp(): case is ignored.
773 'smartcase' is not used.
775 The "=~" and "!~" operators match the lefthand argument with the righthand
776 argument, which is used as a pattern. See |pattern| for what a pattern is.
777 This matching is always done like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no
778 matter what the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is. This makes scripts
779 portable. To avoid backslashes in the regexp pattern to be doubled, use a
780 single-quote string, see |literal-string|.
781 Since a string is considered to be a single line, a multi-line pattern
782 (containing \n, backslash-n) will not match. However, a literal NL character
783 can be matched like an ordinary character. Examples:
784 "foo\nbar" =~ "\n" evaluates to 1
785 "foo\nbar" =~ "\\n" evaluates to 0
788 expr5 and expr6 *expr5* *expr6*
789 ---------------
790 expr6 + expr6 .. Number addition or |List| concatenation *expr-+*
791 expr6 - expr6 .. Number subtraction *expr--*
792 expr6 . expr6 .. String concatenation *expr-.*
794 For |Lists| only "+" is possible and then both expr6 must be a list. The
795 result is a new list with the two lists Concatenated.
797 expr7 * expr7 .. number multiplication *expr-star*
798 expr7 / expr7 .. number division *expr-/*
799 expr7 % expr7 .. number modulo *expr-%*
801 For all, except ".", Strings are converted to Numbers.
803 Note the difference between "+" and ".":
804 "123" + "456" = 579
805 "123" . "456" = "123456"
807 Since '.' has the same precedence as '+' and '-', you need to read: >
808 1 . 90 + 90.0
809 As: >
810 (1 . 90) + 90.0
811 That works, since the String "190" is automatically converted to the Number
812 190, which can be added to the Float 90.0. However: >
813 1 . 90 * 90.0
814 Should be read as: >
815 1 . (90 * 90.0)
816 Since '.' has lower precedence than '*'. This does NOT work, since this
817 attempts to concatenate a Float and a String.
819 When dividing a Number by zero the result depends on the value:
820 0 / 0 = -0x80000000 (like NaN for Float)
821 >0 / 0 = 0x7fffffff (like positive infinity)
822 <0 / 0 = -0x7fffffff (like negative infinity)
823 (before Vim 7.2 it was always 0x7fffffff)
825 When the righthand side of '%' is zero, the result is 0.
827 None of these work for |Funcref|s.
829 . and % do not work for Float. *E804*
832 expr7 *expr7*
833 -----
834 ! expr7 logical NOT *expr-!*
835 - expr7 unary minus *expr-unary--*
836 + expr7 unary plus *expr-unary-+*
838 For '!' non-zero becomes zero, zero becomes one.
839 For '-' the sign of the number is changed.
840 For '+' the number is unchanged.
842 A String will be converted to a Number first.
844 These three can be repeated and mixed. Examples:
845 !-1 == 0
846 !!8 == 1
847 --9 == 9
850 expr8 *expr8*
851 -----
852 expr8[expr1] item of String or |List| *expr-[]* *E111*
854 If expr8 is a Number or String this results in a String that contains the
855 expr1'th single byte from expr8. expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a
856 Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |byteidx()| for
857 an alternative.
859 Index zero gives the first character. This is like it works in C. Careful:
860 text column numbers start with one! Example, to get the character under the
861 cursor: >
862 :let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
864 If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty
865 String. A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backwards
866 compatibility). Use [-1:] to get the last byte.
868 If expr8 is a |List| then it results the item at index expr1. See |list-index|
869 for possible index values. If the index is out of range this results in an
870 error. Example: >
871 :let item = mylist[-1] " get last item
873 Generally, if a |List| index is equal to or higher than the length of the
874 |List|, or more negative than the length of the |List|, this results in an
875 error.
878 expr8[expr1a : expr1b] substring or sublist *expr-[:]*
880 If expr8 is a Number or String this results in the substring with the bytes
881 from expr1a to and including expr1b. expr8 is used as a String, expr1a and
882 expr1b are used as a Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see
883 |byteidx()| for computing the indexes.
885 If expr1a is omitted zero is used. If expr1b is omitted the length of the
886 string minus one is used.
888 A negative number can be used to measure from the end of the string. -1 is
889 the last character, -2 the last but one, etc.
891 If an index goes out of range for the string characters are omitted. If
892 expr1b is smaller than expr1a the result is an empty string.
894 Examples: >
895 :let c = name[-1:] " last byte of a string
896 :let c = name[-2:-2] " last but one byte of a string
897 :let s = line(".")[4:] " from the fifth byte to the end
898 :let s = s[:-3] " remove last two bytes
899 <
900 *sublist* *slice*
901 If expr8 is a |List| this results in a new |List| with the items indicated by
902 the indexes expr1a and expr1b. This works like with a String, as explained
903 just above, except that indexes out of range cause an error. Examples: >
904 :let l = mylist[:3] " first four items
905 :let l = mylist[4:4] " List with one item
906 :let l = mylist[:] " shallow copy of a List
908 Using expr8[expr1] or expr8[expr1a : expr1b] on a |Funcref| results in an
909 error.
912 expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary| *expr-entry*
914 If expr8 is a |Dictionary| and it is followed by a dot, then the following
915 name will be used as a key in the |Dictionary|. This is just like:
916 expr8[name].
918 The name must consist of alphanumeric characters, just like a variable name,
919 but it may start with a number. Curly braces cannot be used.
921 There must not be white space before or after the dot.
923 Examples: >
924 :let dict = {"one": 1, 2: "two"}
925 :echo dict.one
926 :echo dict .2
928 Note that the dot is also used for String concatenation. To avoid confusion
929 always put spaces around the dot for String concatenation.
932 expr8(expr1, ...) |Funcref| function call
934 When expr8 is a |Funcref| type variable, invoke the function it refers to.
938 *expr9*
939 number
940 ------
941 number number constant *expr-number*
943 Decimal, Hexadecimal (starting with 0x or 0X), or Octal (starting with 0).
945 *floating-point-format*
946 Floating point numbers can be written in two forms:
948 [-+]{N}.{M}
949 [-+]{N}.{M}e[-+]{exp}
951 {N} and {M} are numbers. Both {N} and {M} must be present and can only
952 contain digits.
953 [-+] means there is an optional plus or minus sign.
954 {exp} is the exponent, power of 10.
955 Only a decimal point is accepted, not a comma. No matter what the current
956 locale is.
957 {only when compiled with the |+float| feature}
959 Examples:
960 123.456
961 +0.0001
962 55.0
963 -0.123
964 1.234e03
965 1.0E-6
966 -3.1416e+88
968 These are INVALID:
969 3. empty {M}
970 1e40 missing .{M}
972 *float-pi* *float-e*
973 A few useful values to copy&paste: >
974 :let pi = 3.14159265359
975 :let e = 2.71828182846
977 Rationale:
978 Before floating point was introduced, the text "123.456" was interpreted as
979 the two numbers "123" and "456", both converted to a string and concatenated,
980 resulting in the string "123456". Since this was considered pointless, and we
981 could not find it intentionally being used in Vim scripts, this backwards
982 incompatibility was accepted in favor of being able to use the normal notation
983 for floating point numbers.
985 *floating-point-precision*
986 The precision and range of floating points numbers depends on what "double"
987 means in the library Vim was compiled with. There is no way to change this at
988 runtime.
990 The default for displaying a |Float| is to use 6 decimal places, like using
991 printf("%g", f). You can select something else when using the |printf()|
992 function. Example: >
993 :echo printf('%.15e', atan(1))
994 < 7.853981633974483e-01
998 string *expr-string* *E114*
999 ------
1000 "string" string constant *expr-quote*
1002 Note that double quotes are used.
1004 A string constant accepts these special characters:
1005 \... three-digit octal number (e.g., "\316")
1006 \.. two-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit)
1007 \. one-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit)
1008 \x.. byte specified with two hex numbers (e.g., "\x1f")
1009 \x. byte specified with one hex number (must be followed by non-hex char)
1010 \X.. same as \x..
1011 \X. same as \x.
1012 \u.... character specified with up to 4 hex numbers, stored according to the
1013 current value of 'encoding' (e.g., "\u02a4")
1014 \U.... same as \u....
1015 \b backspace <BS>
1016 \e escape <Esc>
1017 \f formfeed <FF>
1018 \n newline <NL>
1019 \r return <CR>
1020 \t tab <Tab>
1021 \\ backslash
1022 \" double quote
1023 \<xxx> Special key named "xxx". e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W.
1025 Note that "\xff" is stored as the byte 255, which may be invalid in some
1026 encodings. Use "\u00ff" to store character 255 according to the current value
1027 of 'encoding'.
1029 Note that "\000" and "\x00" force the end of the string.
1032 literal-string *literal-string* *E115*
1033 ---------------
1034 'string' string constant *expr-'*
1036 Note that single quotes are used.
1038 This string is taken as it is. No backslashes are removed or have a special
1039 meaning. The only exception is that two quotes stand for one quote.
1041 Single quoted strings are useful for patterns, so that backslashes do not need
1042 to be doubled. These two commands are equivalent: >
1043 if a =~ "\\s*"
1044 if a =~ '\s*'
1047 option *expr-option* *E112* *E113*
1048 ------
1049 &option option value, local value if possible
1050 &g:option global option value
1051 &l:option local option value
1053 Examples: >
1054 echo "tabstop is " . &tabstop
1055 if &insertmode
1057 Any option name can be used here. See |options|. When using the local value
1058 and there is no buffer-local or window-local value, the global value is used
1059 anyway.
1062 register *expr-register* *@r*
1063 --------
1064 @r contents of register 'r'
1066 The result is the contents of the named register, as a single string.
1067 Newlines are inserted where required. To get the contents of the unnamed
1068 register use @" or @@. See |registers| for an explanation of the available
1069 registers.
1071 When using the '=' register you get the expression itself, not what it
1072 evaluates to. Use |eval()| to evaluate it.
1075 nesting *expr-nesting* *E110*
1076 -------
1077 (expr1) nested expression
1080 environment variable *expr-env*
1081 --------------------
1082 $VAR environment variable
1084 The String value of any environment variable. When it is not defined, the
1085 result is an empty string.
1086 *expr-env-expand*
1087 Note that there is a difference between using $VAR directly and using
1088 expand("$VAR"). Using it directly will only expand environment variables that
1089 are known inside the current Vim session. Using expand() will first try using
1090 the environment variables known inside the current Vim session. If that
1091 fails, a shell will be used to expand the variable. This can be slow, but it
1092 does expand all variables that the shell knows about. Example: >
1093 :echo $version
1094 :echo expand("$version")
1095 The first one probably doesn't echo anything, the second echoes the $version
1096 variable (if your shell supports it).
1099 internal variable *expr-variable*
1100 -----------------
1101 variable internal variable
1102 See below |internal-variables|.
1105 function call *expr-function* *E116* *E118* *E119* *E120*
1106 -------------
1107 function(expr1, ...) function call
1108 See below |functions|.
1111 ==============================================================================
1112 3. Internal variable *internal-variables* *E121*
1113 *E461*
1114 An internal variable name can be made up of letters, digits and '_'. But it
1115 cannot start with a digit. It's also possible to use curly braces, see
1116 |curly-braces-names|.
1118 An internal variable is created with the ":let" command |:let|.
1119 An internal variable is explicitly destroyed with the ":unlet" command
1120 |:unlet|.
1121 Using a name that is not an internal variable or refers to a variable that has
1122 been destroyed results in an error.
1124 There are several name spaces for variables. Which one is to be used is
1125 specified by what is prepended:
1127 (nothing) In a function: local to a function; otherwise: global
1128 |buffer-variable| b: Local to the current buffer.
1129 |window-variable| w: Local to the current window.
1130 |tabpage-variable| t: Local to the current tab page.
1131 |global-variable| g: Global.
1132 |local-variable| l: Local to a function.
1133 |script-variable| s: Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script.
1134 |function-argument| a: Function argument (only inside a function).
1135 |vim-variable| v: Global, predefined by Vim.
1137 The scope name by itself can be used as a |Dictionary|. For example, to
1138 delete all script-local variables: >
1139 :for k in keys(s:)
1140 : unlet s:[k]
1141 :endfor
1142 <
1143 *buffer-variable* *b:var*
1144 A variable name that is preceded with "b:" is local to the current buffer.
1145 Thus you can have several "b:foo" variables, one for each buffer.
1146 This kind of variable is deleted when the buffer is wiped out or deleted with
1147 |:bdelete|.
1149 One local buffer variable is predefined:
1150 *b:changedtick-variable* *changetick*
1151 b:changedtick The total number of changes to the current buffer. It is
1152 incremented for each change. An undo command is also a change
1153 in this case. This can be used to perform an action only when
1154 the buffer has changed. Example: >
1155 :if my_changedtick != b:changedtick
1156 : let my_changedtick = b:changedtick
1157 : call My_Update()
1158 :endif
1159 <
1160 *window-variable* *w:var*
1161 A variable name that is preceded with "w:" is local to the current window. It
1162 is deleted when the window is closed.
1164 *tabpage-variable* *t:var*
1165 A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page,
1166 It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled
1167 without the +windows feature}
1169 *global-variable* *g:var*
1170 Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:". Omitting this will
1171 access a variable local to a function. But "g:" can also be used in any other
1172 place if you like.
1174 *local-variable* *l:var*
1175 Inside functions local variables are accessed without prepending anything.
1176 But you can also prepend "l:" if you like. However, without prepending "l:"
1177 you may run into reserved variable names. For example "count". By itself it
1178 refers to "v:count". Using "l:count" you can have a local variable with the
1179 same name.
1181 *script-variable* *s:var*
1182 In a Vim script variables starting with "s:" can be used. They cannot be
1183 accessed from outside of the scripts, thus are local to the script.
1185 They can be used in:
1186 - commands executed while the script is sourced
1187 - functions defined in the script
1188 - autocommands defined in the script
1189 - functions and autocommands defined in functions and autocommands which were
1190 defined in the script (recursively)
1191 - user defined commands defined in the script
1192 Thus not in:
1193 - other scripts sourced from this one
1194 - mappings
1195 - menus
1196 - etc.
1198 Script variables can be used to avoid conflicts with global variable names.
1199 Take this example: >
1201 let s:counter = 0
1202 function MyCounter()
1203 let s:counter = s:counter + 1
1204 echo s:counter
1205 endfunction
1206 command Tick call MyCounter()
1208 You can now invoke "Tick" from any script, and the "s:counter" variable in
1209 that script will not be changed, only the "s:counter" in the script where
1210 "Tick" was defined is used.
1212 Another example that does the same: >
1214 let s:counter = 0
1215 command Tick let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | echo s:counter
1217 When calling a function and invoking a user-defined command, the context for
1218 script variables is set to the script where the function or command was
1219 defined.
1221 The script variables are also available when a function is defined inside a
1222 function that is defined in a script. Example: >
1224 let s:counter = 0
1225 function StartCounting(incr)
1226 if a:incr
1227 function MyCounter()
1228 let s:counter = s:counter + 1
1229 endfunction
1230 else
1231 function MyCounter()
1232 let s:counter = s:counter - 1
1233 endfunction
1234 endif
1235 endfunction
1237 This defines the MyCounter() function either for counting up or counting down
1238 when calling StartCounting(). It doesn't matter from where StartCounting() is
1239 called, the s:counter variable will be accessible in MyCounter().
1241 When the same script is sourced again it will use the same script variables.
1242 They will remain valid as long as Vim is running. This can be used to
1243 maintain a counter: >
1245 if !exists("s:counter")
1246 let s:counter = 1
1247 echo "script executed for the first time"
1248 else
1249 let s:counter = s:counter + 1
1250 echo "script executed " . s:counter . " times now"
1251 endif
1253 Note that this means that filetype plugins don't get a different set of script
1254 variables for each buffer. Use local buffer variables instead |b:var|.
1257 Predefined Vim variables: *vim-variable* *v:var*
1259 *v:beval_col* *beval_col-variable*
1260 v:beval_col The number of the column, over which the mouse pointer is.
1261 This is the byte index in the |v:beval_lnum| line.
1262 Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
1264 *v:beval_bufnr* *beval_bufnr-variable*
1265 v:beval_bufnr The number of the buffer, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
1266 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
1268 *v:beval_lnum* *beval_lnum-variable*
1269 v:beval_lnum The number of the line, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
1270 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
1272 *v:beval_text* *beval_text-variable*
1273 v:beval_text The text under or after the mouse pointer. Usually a word as
1274 it is useful for debugging a C program. 'iskeyword' applies,
1275 but a dot and "->" before the position is included. When on a
1276 ']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and
1277 word before it. When on a Visual area within one line the
1278 highlighted text is used.
1279 Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
1281 *v:beval_winnr* *beval_winnr-variable*
1282 v:beval_winnr The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
1283 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
1285 *v:char* *char-variable*
1286 v:char Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed
1287 character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |map-<expr>|.
1289 *v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable*
1290 v:charconvert_from
1291 The name of the character encoding of a file to be converted.
1292 Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option.
1294 *v:charconvert_to* *charconvert_to-variable*
1295 v:charconvert_to
1296 The name of the character encoding of a file after conversion.
1297 Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option.
1299 *v:cmdarg* *cmdarg-variable*
1300 v:cmdarg This variable is used for two purposes:
1301 1. The extra arguments given to a file read/write command.
1302 Currently these are "++enc=" and "++ff=". This variable is
1303 set before an autocommand event for a file read/write
1304 command is triggered. There is a leading space to make it
1305 possible to append this variable directly after the
1306 read/write command. Note: The "+cmd" argument isn't
1307 included here, because it will be executed anyway.
1308 2. When printing a PostScript file with ":hardcopy" this is
1309 the argument for the ":hardcopy" command. This can be used
1310 in 'printexpr'.
1312 *v:cmdbang* *cmdbang-variable*
1313 v:cmdbang Set like v:cmdarg for a file read/write command. When a "!"
1314 was used the value is 1, otherwise it is 0. Note that this
1315 can only be used in autocommands. For user commands |<bang>|
1316 can be used.
1318 *v:count* *count-variable*
1319 v:count The count given for the last Normal mode command. Can be used
1320 to get the count before a mapping. Read-only. Example: >
1321 :map _x :<C-U>echo "the count is " . v:count<CR>
1322 < Note: The <C-U> is required to remove the line range that you
1323 get when typing ':' after a count.
1324 When there are two counts, as in "3d2w", they are multiplied,
1325 just like what happens in the command, "d6w" for the example.
1326 Also used for evaluating the 'formatexpr' option.
1327 "count" also works, for backwards compatibility.
1329 *v:count1* *count1-variable*
1330 v:count1 Just like "v:count", but defaults to one when no count is
1331 used.
1333 *v:ctype* *ctype-variable*
1334 v:ctype The current locale setting for characters of the runtime
1335 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
1336 current locale encoding. Technical: it's the value of
1337 LC_CTYPE. When not using a locale the value is "C".
1338 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
1339 command.
1340 See |multi-lang|.
1342 *v:dying* *dying-variable*
1343 v:dying Normally zero. When a deadly signal is caught it's set to
1344 one. When multiple signals are caught the number increases.
1345 Can be used in an autocommand to check if Vim didn't
1346 terminate normally. {only works on Unix}
1347 Example: >
1348 :au VimLeave * if v:dying | echo "\nAAAAaaaarrrggghhhh!!!\n" | endif
1349 <
1350 *v:errmsg* *errmsg-variable*
1351 v:errmsg Last given error message. It's allowed to set this variable.
1352 Example: >
1353 :let v:errmsg = ""
1354 :silent! next
1355 :if v:errmsg != ""
1356 : ... handle error
1357 < "errmsg" also works, for backwards compatibility.
1359 *v:exception* *exception-variable*
1360 v:exception The value of the exception most recently caught and not
1361 finished. See also |v:throwpoint| and |throw-variables|.
1362 Example: >
1363 :try
1364 : throw "oops"
1365 :catch /.*/
1366 : echo "caught" v:exception
1367 :endtry
1368 < Output: "caught oops".
1370 *v:fcs_reason* *fcs_reason-variable*
1371 v:fcs_reason The reason why the |FileChangedShell| event was triggered.
1372 Can be used in an autocommand to decide what to do and/or what
1373 to set v:fcs_choice to. Possible values:
1374 deleted file no longer exists
1375 conflict file contents, mode or timestamp was
1376 changed and buffer is modified
1377 changed file contents has changed
1378 mode mode of file changed
1379 time only file timestamp changed
1381 *v:fcs_choice* *fcs_choice-variable*
1382 v:fcs_choice What should happen after a |FileChangedShell| event was
1383 triggered. Can be used in an autocommand to tell Vim what to
1384 do with the affected buffer:
1385 reload Reload the buffer (does not work if
1386 the file was deleted).
1387 ask Ask the user what to do, as if there
1388 was no autocommand. Except that when
1389 only the timestamp changed nothing
1390 will happen.
1391 <empty> Nothing, the autocommand should do
1392 everything that needs to be done.
1393 The default is empty. If another (invalid) value is used then
1394 Vim behaves like it is empty, there is no warning message.
1396 *v:fname_in* *fname_in-variable*
1397 v:fname_in The name of the input file. Valid while evaluating:
1398 option used for ~
1399 'charconvert' file to be converted
1400 'diffexpr' original file
1401 'patchexpr' original file
1402 'printexpr' file to be printed
1403 And set to the swap file name for |SwapExists|.
1405 *v:fname_out* *fname_out-variable*
1406 v:fname_out The name of the output file. Only valid while
1407 evaluating:
1408 option used for ~
1409 'charconvert' resulting converted file (*)
1410 'diffexpr' output of diff
1411 'patchexpr' resulting patched file
1412 (*) When doing conversion for a write command (e.g., ":w
1413 file") it will be equal to v:fname_in. When doing conversion
1414 for a read command (e.g., ":e file") it will be a temporary
1415 file and different from v:fname_in.
1417 *v:fname_new* *fname_new-variable*
1418 v:fname_new The name of the new version of the file. Only valid while
1419 evaluating 'diffexpr'.
1421 *v:fname_diff* *fname_diff-variable*
1422 v:fname_diff The name of the diff (patch) file. Only valid while
1423 evaluating 'patchexpr'.
1425 *v:folddashes* *folddashes-variable*
1426 v:folddashes Used for 'foldtext': dashes representing foldlevel of a closed
1427 fold.
1428 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
1430 *v:foldlevel* *foldlevel-variable*
1431 v:foldlevel Used for 'foldtext': foldlevel of closed fold.
1432 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
1434 *v:foldend* *foldend-variable*
1435 v:foldend Used for 'foldtext': last line of closed fold.
1436 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
1438 *v:foldstart* *foldstart-variable*
1439 v:foldstart Used for 'foldtext': first line of closed fold.
1440 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
1442 *v:insertmode* *insertmode-variable*
1443 v:insertmode Used for the |InsertEnter| and |InsertChange| autocommand
1444 events. Values:
1445 i Insert mode
1446 r Replace mode
1447 v Virtual Replace mode
1449 *v:key* *key-variable*
1450 v:key Key of the current item of a |Dictionary|. Only valid while
1451 evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |filter()|.
1452 Read-only.
1454 *v:lang* *lang-variable*
1455 v:lang The current locale setting for messages of the runtime
1456 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
1457 current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_MESSAGES.
1458 The value is system dependent.
1459 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
1460 command.
1461 It can be different from |v:ctype| when messages are desired
1462 in a different language than what is used for character
1463 encoding. See |multi-lang|.
1465 *v:lc_time* *lc_time-variable*
1466 v:lc_time The current locale setting for time messages of the runtime
1467 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
1468 current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_TIME.
1469 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
1470 command. See |multi-lang|.
1472 *v:lnum* *lnum-variable*
1473 v:lnum Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr| and 'indentexpr'
1474 expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel' and
1475 'guitabtooltip'. Only valid while one of these expressions is
1476 being evaluated. Read-only when in the |sandbox|.
1478 *v:mouse_win* *mouse_win-variable*
1479 v:mouse_win Window number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
1480 First window has number 1, like with |winnr()|. The value is
1481 zero when there was no mouse button click.
1483 *v:mouse_lnum* *mouse_lnum-variable*
1484 v:mouse_lnum Line number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
1485 This is the text line number, not the screen line number. The
1486 value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
1488 *v:mouse_col* *mouse_col-variable*
1489 v:mouse_col Column number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
1490 This is the screen column number, like with |virtcol()|. The
1491 value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
1493 *v:oldfiles* *oldfiles-variable*
1494 v:oldfiles List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on
1495 startup. These are the files that Vim remembers marks for.
1496 The length of the List is limited by the ' argument of the
1497 'viminfo' option (default is 100).
1498 Also see |:oldfiles| and |c_#<|.
1499 The List can be modified, but this has no effect on what is
1500 stored in the |viminfo| file later. If you use values other
1501 than String this will cause trouble.
1502 {only when compiled with the +viminfo feature}
1504 *v:operator* *operator-variable*
1505 v:operator The last operator given in Normal mode. This is a single
1506 character except for commands starting with <g> or <z>,
1507 in which case it is two characters. Best used alongside
1508 |v:prevcount| and |v:register|. Useful if you want to cancel
1509 Operator-pending mode and then use the operator, e.g.: >
1510 :omap O <Esc>:call MyMotion(v:operator)<CR>
1511 < The value remains set until another operator is entered, thus
1512 don't expect it to be empty.
1513 v:operator is not set for |:delete|, |:yank| or other Ex
1514 commands.
1515 Read-only.
1517 *v:prevcount* *prevcount-variable*
1518 v:prevcount The count given for the last but one Normal mode command.
1519 This is the v:count value of the previous command. Useful if
1520 you want to cancel Visual or Operator-pending mode and then
1521 use the count, e.g.: >
1522 :vmap % <Esc>:call MyFilter(v:prevcount)<CR>
1523 < Read-only.
1525 *v:profiling* *profiling-variable*
1526 v:profiling Normally zero. Set to one after using ":profile start".
1527 See |profiling|.
1529 *v:progname* *progname-variable*
1530 v:progname Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was
1531 invoked. Allows you to do special initialisations for "view",
1532 "evim" etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
1533 Read-only.
1535 *v:register* *register-variable*
1536 v:register The name of the register supplied to the last normal mode
1537 command. Empty if none were supplied. |getreg()| |setreg()|
1539 *v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable*
1540 v:scrollstart String describing the script or function that caused the
1541 screen to scroll up. It's only set when it is empty, thus the
1542 first reason is remembered. It is set to "Unknown" for a
1543 typed command.
1544 This can be used to find out why your script causes the
1545 hit-enter prompt.
1547 *v:servername* *servername-variable*
1548 v:servername The resulting registered |x11-clientserver| name if any.
1549 Read-only.
1552 v:searchforward *v:searchforward* *searchforward-variable*
1553 Search direction: 1 after a forward search, 0 after a
1554 backward search. It is reset to forward when directly setting
1555 the last search pattern, see |quote/|.
1556 Note that the value is restored when returning from a
1557 function. |function-search-undo|.
1558 Read-write.
1560 *v:shell_error* *shell_error-variable*
1561 v:shell_error Result of the last shell command. When non-zero, the last
1562 shell command had an error. When zero, there was no problem.
1563 This only works when the shell returns the error code to Vim.
1564 The value -1 is often used when the command could not be
1565 executed. Read-only.
1566 Example: >
1567 :!mv foo bar
1568 :if v:shell_error
1569 : echo 'could not rename "foo" to "bar"!'
1570 :endif
1571 < "shell_error" also works, for backwards compatibility.
1573 *v:statusmsg* *statusmsg-variable*
1574 v:statusmsg Last given status message. It's allowed to set this variable.
1576 *v:swapname* *swapname-variable*
1577 v:swapname Only valid when executing |SwapExists| autocommands: Name of
1578 the swap file found. Read-only.
1580 *v:swapchoice* *swapchoice-variable*
1581 v:swapchoice |SwapExists| autocommands can set this to the selected choice
1582 for handling an existing swap file:
1583 'o' Open read-only
1584 'e' Edit anyway
1585 'r' Recover
1586 'd' Delete swapfile
1587 'q' Quit
1588 'a' Abort
1589 The value should be a single-character string. An empty value
1590 results in the user being asked, as would happen when there is
1591 no SwapExists autocommand. The default is empty.
1593 *v:swapcommand* *swapcommand-variable*
1594 v:swapcommand Normal mode command to be executed after a file has been
1595 opened. Can be used for a |SwapExists| autocommand to have
1596 another Vim open the file and jump to the right place. For
1597 example, when jumping to a tag the value is ":tag tagname\r".
1598 For ":edit +cmd file" the value is ":cmd\r".
1600 *v:termresponse* *termresponse-variable*
1601 v:termresponse The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV|
1602 termcap entry. It is set when Vim receives an escape sequence
1603 that starts with ESC [ or CSI and ends in a 'c', with only
1604 digits, ';' and '.' in between.
1605 When this option is set, the TermResponse autocommand event is
1606 fired, so that you can react to the response from the
1607 terminal.
1608 The response from a new xterm is: "<Esc>[ Pp ; Pv ; Pc c". Pp
1609 is the terminal type: 0 for vt100 and 1 for vt220. Pv is the
1610 patch level (since this was introduced in patch 95, it's
1611 always 95 or bigger). Pc is always zero.
1612 {only when compiled with |+termresponse| feature}
1614 *v:this_session* *this_session-variable*
1615 v:this_session Full filename of the last loaded or saved session file. See
1616 |:mksession|. It is allowed to set this variable. When no
1617 session file has been saved, this variable is empty.
1618 "this_session" also works, for backwards compatibility.
1620 *v:throwpoint* *throwpoint-variable*
1621 v:throwpoint The point where the exception most recently caught and not
1622 finished was thrown. Not set when commands are typed. See
1623 also |v:exception| and |throw-variables|.
1624 Example: >
1625 :try
1626 : throw "oops"
1627 :catch /.*/
1628 : echo "Exception from" v:throwpoint
1629 :endtry
1630 < Output: "Exception from test.vim, line 2"
1632 *v:val* *val-variable*
1633 v:val Value of the current item of a |List| or |Dictionary|. Only
1634 valid while evaluating the expression used with |map()| and
1635 |filter()|. Read-only.
1637 *v:version* *version-variable*
1638 v:version Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus
1639 minor version number. Version 5.0 is 500. Version 5.1 (5.01)
1640 is 501. Read-only. "version" also works, for backwards
1641 compatibility.
1642 Use |has()| to check if a certain patch was included, e.g.: >
1643 if has("patch123")
1644 < Note that patch numbers are specific to the version, thus both
1645 version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are
1646 completely different.
1648 *v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable*
1649 v:warningmsg Last given warning message. It's allowed to set this variable.
1651 ==============================================================================
1652 4. Builtin Functions *functions*
1654 See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for.
1656 (Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.)
1658 USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~
1660 abs( {expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr}
1661 add( {list}, {item}) List append {item} to |List| {list}
1662 append( {lnum}, {string}) Number append {string} below line {lnum}
1663 append( {lnum}, {list}) Number append lines {list} below line {lnum}
1664 argc() Number number of files in the argument list
1665 argidx() Number current index in the argument list
1666 argv( {nr}) String {nr} entry of the argument list
1667 argv( ) List the argument list
1668 atan( {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr}
1669 browse( {save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
1670 String put up a file requester
1671 browsedir( {title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester
1672 bufexists( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} exists
1673 buflisted( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is listed
1674 bufloaded( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is loaded
1675 bufname( {expr}) String Name of the buffer {expr}
1676 bufnr( {expr}) Number Number of the buffer {expr}
1677 bufwinnr( {expr}) Number window number of buffer {expr}
1678 byte2line( {byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte}
1679 byteidx( {expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
1680 call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
1681 any call {func} with arguments {arglist}
1682 ceil( {expr}) Float round {expr} up
1683 changenr() Number current change number
1684 char2nr( {expr}) Number ASCII value of first char in {expr}
1685 cindent( {lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum}
1686 clearmatches() none clear all matches
1687 col( {expr}) Number column nr of cursor or mark
1688 complete( {startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion
1689 complete_add( {expr}) Number add completion match
1690 complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion
1691 confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
1692 Number number of choice picked by user
1693 copy( {expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr}
1694 cos( {expr}) Float cosine of {expr}
1695 count( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
1696 Number count how many {expr} are in {list}
1697 cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
1698 Number checks existence of cscope connection
1699 cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {coladd}])
1700 Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {coladd}
1701 cursor( {list}) Number move cursor to position in {list}
1702 deepcopy( {expr}) any make a full copy of {expr}
1703 delete( {fname}) Number delete file {fname}
1704 did_filetype() Number TRUE if FileType autocommand event used
1705 diff_filler( {lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum}
1706 diff_hlID( {lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col}
1707 empty( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is empty
1708 escape( {string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\'
1709 eval( {string}) any evaluate {string} into its value
1710 eventhandler( ) Number TRUE if inside an event handler
1711 executable( {expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists
1712 exists( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} exists
1713 extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
1714 List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
1715 expand( {expr} [, {flag}]) String expand special keywords in {expr}
1716 feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer
1717 filereadable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a readable file
1718 filewritable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a writable file
1719 filter( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict remove items from {expr} where
1720 {string} is 0
1721 finddir( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
1722 String find directory {name} in {path}
1723 findfile( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
1724 String find file {name} in {path}
1725 float2nr( {expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number
1726 floor( {expr}) Float round {expr} down
1727 fnameescape( {fname}) String escape special characters in {fname}
1728 fnamemodify( {fname}, {mods}) String modify file name
1729 foldclosed( {lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
1730 foldclosedend( {lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed
1731 foldlevel( {lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum}
1732 foldtext( ) String line displayed for closed fold
1733 foldtextresult( {lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum}
1734 foreground( ) Number bring the Vim window to the foreground
1735 function( {name}) Funcref reference to function {name}
1736 garbagecollect( [at_exit]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references
1737 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
1738 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
1739 getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
1740 List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr}
1741 getbufvar( {expr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
1742 getchar( [expr]) Number get one character from the user
1743 getcharmod( ) Number modifiers for the last typed character
1744 getcmdline() String return the current command-line
1745 getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line
1746 getcmdtype() String return the current command-line type
1747 getcwd() String the current working directory
1748 getfperm( {fname}) String file permissions of file {fname}
1749 getfsize( {fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname}
1750 getfontname( [{name}]) String name of font being used
1751 getftime( {fname}) Number last modification time of file
1752 getftype( {fname}) String description of type of file {fname}
1753 getline( {lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer
1754 getline( {lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
1755 getloclist( {nr}) List list of location list items
1756 getmatches() List list of current matches
1757 getpid() Number process ID of Vim
1758 getpos( {expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc.
1759 getqflist() List list of quickfix items
1760 getreg( [{regname} [, 1]]) String contents of register
1761 getregtype( [{regname}]) String type of register
1762 gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name})
1763 any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
1764 getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
1765 getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
1766 getwinvar( {nr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in window {nr}
1767 glob( {expr} [, {flag}]) String expand file wildcards in {expr}
1768 globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {flag}])
1769 String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
1770 has( {feature}) Number TRUE if feature {feature} supported
1771 has_key( {dict}, {key}) Number TRUE if {dict} has entry {key}
1772 haslocaldir() Number TRUE if current window executed |:lcd|
1773 hasmapto( {what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
1774 Number TRUE if mapping to {what} exists
1775 histadd( {history},{item}) String add an item to a history
1776 histdel( {history} [, {item}]) String remove an item from a history
1777 histget( {history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history
1778 histnr( {history}) Number highest index of a history
1779 hlexists( {name}) Number TRUE if highlight group {name} exists
1780 hlID( {name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name}
1781 hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on
1782 iconv( {expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr}
1783 indent( {lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum}
1784 index( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
1785 Number index in {list} where {expr} appears
1786 input( {prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
1787 String get input from the user
1788 inputdialog( {p} [, {t} [, {c}]]) String like input() but in a GUI dialog
1789 inputlist( {textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list
1790 inputrestore() Number restore typeahead
1791 inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead
1792 inputsecret( {prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text
1793 insert( {list}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {list} [before {idx}]
1794 isdirectory( {directory}) Number TRUE if {directory} is a directory
1795 islocked( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is locked
1796 items( {dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict}
1797 join( {list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String
1798 keys( {dict}) List keys in {dict}
1799 len( {expr}) Number the length of {expr}
1800 libcall( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg}
1801 libcallnr( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number
1802 line( {expr}) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark
1803 line2byte( {lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum}
1804 lispindent( {lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum}
1805 localtime() Number current time
1806 log10( {expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
1807 map( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict change each item in {expr} to {expr}
1808 maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
1809 String rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
1810 mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
1811 String check for mappings matching {name}
1812 match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
1813 Number position where {pat} matches in {expr}
1814 matchadd( {group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
1815 Number highlight {pattern} with {group}
1816 matcharg( {nr}) List arguments of |:match|
1817 matchdelete( {id}) Number delete match identified by {id}
1818 matchend( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
1819 Number position where {pat} ends in {expr}
1820 matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
1821 List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr}
1822 matchstr( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
1823 String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
1824 max( {list}) Number maximum value of items in {list}
1825 min( {list}) Number minimum value of items in {list}
1826 mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
1827 Number create directory {name}
1828 mode( [expr]) String current editing mode
1829 nextnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
1830 nr2char( {expr}) String single char with ASCII value {expr}
1831 pathshorten( {expr}) String shorten directory names in a path
1832 pow( {x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y}
1833 prevnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
1834 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text
1835 pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible
1836 range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
1837 List items from {expr} to {max}
1838 readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
1839 List get list of lines from file {fname}
1840 reltime( [{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value
1841 reltimestr( {time}) String turn time value into a String
1842 remote_expr( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
1843 String send expression
1844 remote_foreground( {server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground
1845 remote_peek( {serverid} [, {retvar}])
1846 Number check for reply string
1847 remote_read( {serverid}) String read reply string
1848 remote_send( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
1849 String send key sequence
1850 remove( {list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any remove items {idx}-{end} from {list}
1851 remove( {dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict}
1852 rename( {from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to}
1853 repeat( {expr}, {count}) String repeat {expr} {count} times
1854 resolve( {filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to
1855 reverse( {list}) List reverse {list} in-place
1856 round( {expr}) Float round off {expr}
1857 search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
1858 Number search for {pattern}
1859 searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
1860 Number search for variable declaration
1861 searchpair( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
1862 Number search for other end of start/end pair
1863 searchpairpos( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
1864 List search for other end of start/end pair
1865 searchpos( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
1866 List search for {pattern}
1867 server2client( {clientid}, {string})
1868 Number send reply string
1869 serverlist() String get a list of available servers
1870 setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
1871 setcmdpos( {pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line
1872 setline( {lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line}
1873 setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}])
1874 Number modify location list using {list}
1875 setmatches( {list}) Number restore a list of matches
1876 setpos( {expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list}
1877 setqflist( {list}[, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list}
1878 setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type
1879 settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window
1880 {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val}
1881 setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
1882 shellescape( {string} [, {special}])
1883 String escape {string} for use as shell
1884 command argument
1885 simplify( {filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible
1886 sin( {expr}) Float sine of {expr}
1887 sort( {list} [, {func}]) List sort {list}, using {func} to compare
1888 soundfold( {word}) String sound-fold {word}
1889 spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor
1890 spellsuggest( {word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
1891 List spelling suggestions
1892 split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
1893 List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr}
1894 sqrt( {expr} Float squar root of {expr}
1895 str2float( {expr}) Float convert String to Float
1896 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) Number convert String to Number
1897 strftime( {format}[, {time}]) String time in specified format
1898 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}])
1899 Number index of {needle} in {haystack}
1900 string( {expr}) String String representation of {expr} value
1901 strlen( {expr}) Number length of the String {expr}
1902 strpart( {src}, {start}[, {len}])
1903 String {len} characters of {src} at {start}
1904 strridx( {haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
1905 Number last index of {needle} in {haystack}
1906 strtrans( {expr}) String translate string to make it printable
1907 submatch( {nr}) String specific match in ":substitute"
1908 substitute( {expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
1909 String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
1910 synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
1911 synIDattr( {synID}, {what} [, {mode}])
1912 String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID}
1913 synIDtrans( {synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID}
1914 synstack( {lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
1915 system( {expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr}
1916 tabpagebuflist( [{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page
1917 tabpagenr( [{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page
1918 tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}])
1919 Number number of current window in tab page
1920 taglist( {expr}) List list of tags matching {expr}
1921 tagfiles() List tags files used
1922 tempname() String name for a temporary file
1923 tolower( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase
1924 toupper( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase
1925 tr( {src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
1926 to chars in {tostr}
1927 trunc( {expr} Float truncate Float {expr}
1928 type( {name}) Number type of variable {name}
1929 values( {dict}) List values in {dict}
1930 virtcol( {expr}) Number screen column of cursor or mark
1931 visualmode( [expr]) String last visual mode used
1932 winbufnr( {nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr}
1933 wincol() Number window column of the cursor
1934 winheight( {nr}) Number height of window {nr}
1935 winline() Number window line of the cursor
1936 winnr( [{expr}]) Number number of current window
1937 winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes
1938 winrestview( {dict}) none restore view of current window
1939 winsaveview() Dict save view of current window
1940 winwidth( {nr}) Number width of window {nr}
1941 writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
1942 Number write list of lines to file {fname}
1944 abs({expr}) *abs()*
1945 Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to
1946 a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be
1947 converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise
1948 abs() gives an error message and returns -1.
1949 Examples: >
1950 echo abs(1.456)
1951 < 1.456 >
1952 echo abs(-5.456)
1953 < 5.456 >
1954 echo abs(-4)
1955 < 4
1956 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
1958 add({list}, {expr}) *add()*
1959 Append the item {expr} to |List| {list}. Returns the
1960 resulting |List|. Examples: >
1961 :let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item)
1962 :call add(mylist, "woodstock")
1963 < Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single
1964 item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
1965 Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.
1968 append({lnum}, {expr}) *append()*
1969 When {expr} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a
1970 text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer.
1971 Otherwise append {expr} as one text line below line {lnum} in
1972 the current buffer.
1973 {lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one.
1974 Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory),
1975 0 for success. Example: >
1976 :let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END")
1977 :let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"])
1978 <
1979 *argc()*
1980 argc() The result is the number of files in the argument list of the
1981 current window. See |arglist|.
1983 *argidx()*
1984 argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is
1985 the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|.
1987 *argv()*
1988 argv([{nr}]) The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
1989 current window. See |arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one.
1990 Example: >
1991 :let i = 0
1992 :while i < argc()
1993 : let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.')
1994 : exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>'
1995 : let i = i + 1
1996 :endwhile
1997 < Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is
1998 returned.
2000 atan({expr}) *atan()*
2001 Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in
2002 the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|.
2003 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
2004 Examples: >
2005 :echo atan(100)
2006 < 1.560797 >
2007 :echo atan(-4.01)
2008 < -1.326405
2009 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
2011 *browse()*
2012 browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
2013 Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")"
2014 returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions).
2015 The input fields are:
2016 {save} when non-zero, select file to write
2017 {title} title for the requester
2018 {initdir} directory to start browsing in
2019 {default} default file name
2020 When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
2021 browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
2023 *browsedir()*
2024 browsedir({title}, {initdir})
2025 Put up a directory requester. This only works when
2026 "has("browse")" returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions).
2027 On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file
2028 browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory
2029 to be used.
2030 The input fields are:
2031 {title} title for the requester
2032 {initdir} directory to start browsing in
2033 When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
2034 browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
2036 bufexists({expr}) *bufexists()*
2037 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called
2038 {expr} exists.
2039 If the {expr} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used.
2040 If the {expr} argument is a string it must match a buffer name
2041 exactly. The name can be:
2042 - Relative to the current directory.
2043 - A full path.
2044 - The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile".
2045 - A URL name.
2046 Unlisted buffers will be found.
2047 Note that help files are listed by their short name in the
2048 output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their
2049 long name to be able to find them.
2050 bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name
2051 with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp
2052 for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1"
2053 Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate
2054 file name.
2055 *buffer_exists()*
2056 Obsolete name: buffer_exists().
2058 buflisted({expr}) *buflisted()*
2059 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called
2060 {expr} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set).
2061 The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
2063 bufloaded({expr}) *bufloaded()*
2064 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called
2065 {expr} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden).
2066 The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
2068 bufname({expr}) *bufname()*
2069 The result is the name of a buffer, as it is displayed by the
2070 ":ls" command.
2071 If {expr} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given.
2072 Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
2073 If {expr} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match
2074 with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is
2075 set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one
2076 match an empty string is returned.
2077 "" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the
2078 alternate buffer.
2079 A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end
2080 or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a
2081 full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the
2082 pattern.
2083 Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match
2084 with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted
2085 buffers are searched for.
2086 If the {expr} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer
2087 number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: >
2088 :echo bufname("3" + 0)
2089 < If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty
2090 string is returned. >
2091 bufname("#") alternate buffer name
2092 bufname(3) name of buffer 3
2093 bufname("%") name of current buffer
2094 bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches.
2095 < *buffer_name()*
2096 Obsolete name: buffer_name().
2098 *bufnr()*
2099 bufnr({expr} [, {create}])
2100 The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
2101 the ":ls" command. For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|
2102 above.
2103 If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the
2104 {create} argument is present and not zero, a new, unlisted,
2105 buffer is created and its number is returned.
2106 bufnr("$") is the last buffer: >
2107 :let last_buffer = bufnr("$")
2108 < The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number
2109 of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller
2110 number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed
2111 them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer.
2112 *buffer_number()*
2113 Obsolete name: buffer_number().
2114 *last_buffer_nr()*
2115 Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr().
2117 bufwinnr({expr}) *bufwinnr()*
2118 The result is a Number, which is the number of the first
2119 window associated with buffer {expr}. For the use of {expr},
2120 see |bufname()| above. If buffer {expr} doesn't exist or
2121 there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: >
2123 echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinnr(1))
2125 < The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
2126 |:wincmd|.
2127 Only deals with the current tab page.
2130 byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()*
2131 Return the line number that contains the character at byte
2132 count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the
2133 end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option
2134 for the current buffer. The first character has byte count
2135 one.
2136 Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|.
2137 {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset|
2138 feature}
2140 byteidx({expr}, {nr}) *byteidx()*
2141 Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the string
2142 {expr}. Use zero for the first character, it returns zero.
2143 This function is only useful when there are multibyte
2144 characters, otherwise the returned value is equal to {nr}.
2145 Composing characters are counted as a separate character.
2146 Example : >
2147 echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3))
2148 < will display the fourth character. Another way to do the
2149 same: >
2150 let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3))
2151 echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1))
2152 < If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned.
2153 If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string
2154 is returned.
2156 call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699*
2157 Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as
2158 arguments.
2159 {func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function.
2160 a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line.
2161 Returns the return value of the called function.
2162 {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be
2163 used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
2165 ceil({expr}) *ceil()*
2166 Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to
2167 {expr} as a |Float| (round up).
2168 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
2169 Examples: >
2170 echo ceil(1.456)
2171 < 2.0 >
2172 echo ceil(-5.456)
2173 < -5.0 >
2174 echo ceil(4.0)
2175 < 4.0
2176 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
2178 changenr() *changenr()*
2179 Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same
2180 number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used
2181 with the |:undo| command.
2182 When a change was made it is the number of that change. After
2183 redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is
2184 one less than the number of the undone change.
2186 char2nr({expr}) *char2nr()*
2187 Return number value of the first char in {expr}. Examples: >
2188 char2nr(" ") returns 32
2189 char2nr("ABC") returns 65
2190 < The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": >
2191 char2nr("á") returns 225
2192 char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195
2193 < |nr2char()| does the opposite.
2195 cindent({lnum}) *cindent()*
2196 Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C
2197 indenting rules, as with 'cindent'.
2198 The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
2199 relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
2200 When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the |+cindent|
2201 feature, -1 is returned.
2202 See |C-indenting|.
2204 clearmatches() *clearmatches()*
2205 Clears all matches previously defined by |matchadd()| and the
2206 |:match| commands.
2208 *col()*
2209 col({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
2210 position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are:
2211 . the cursor position
2212 $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the
2213 number of characters in the cursor line plus one)
2214 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
2215 returned)
2216 Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
2217 and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get
2218 the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is
2219 out of range then col() returns zero.
2220 To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use
2221 |getpos()|.
2222 For the screen column position use |virtcol()|.
2223 Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
2224 Examples: >
2225 col(".") column of cursor
2226 col("$") length of cursor line plus one
2227 col("'t") column of mark t
2228 col("'" . markname) column of mark markname
2229 < The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error.
2230 For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another
2231 buffer.
2232 For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the
2233 column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the
2234 line. This can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: >
2235 :imap <F2> <C-O>:let save_ve = &ve<CR>
2236 \<C-O>:set ve=all<CR>
2237 \<C-O>:echo col(".") . "\n" <Bar>
2238 \let &ve = save_ve<CR>
2239 <
2241 complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785*
2242 Set the matches for Insert mode completion.
2243 Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping
2244 with CTRL-R = |i_CTRL-R|. It does not work after CTRL-O or
2245 with an expression mapping.
2246 {startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed
2247 text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text
2248 that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an
2249 empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a
2250 match.
2251 {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match.
2252 See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible.
2253 Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid
2254 inserting anything that would cause completion to stop.
2255 The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with
2256 Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if
2257 specified, see |ins-completion-menu|.
2258 Example: >
2259 inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR>
2261 func! ListMonths()
2262 call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March',
2263 \ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September',
2264 \ 'October', 'November', 'December'])
2265 return ''
2266 endfunc
2267 < This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that
2268 an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted.
2270 complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()*
2271 Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the
2272 function specified with the 'completefunc' option.
2273 Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory),
2274 1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in
2275 the list.
2276 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is
2277 the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return.
2279 complete_check() *complete_check()*
2280 Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches.
2281 This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time.
2282 Returns non-zero when searching for matches is to be aborted,
2283 zero otherwise.
2284 Only to be used by the function specified with the
2285 'completefunc' option.
2287 *confirm()*
2288 confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
2289 Confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be
2290 made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first
2291 choice this is 1.
2292 Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog
2293 support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|.
2294 {msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the
2295 alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is
2296 used (and translated).
2297 {msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on
2298 some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit.
2299 {choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated
2300 by '\n', e.g. >
2301 confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel")
2302 < The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice.
2303 Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does
2304 not need to be the first letter: >
2305 confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All")
2306 < For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as
2307 the default shortcut key.
2308 The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice
2309 that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first
2310 choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If
2311 {default} is omitted, 1 is used.
2312 The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog. This
2313 is only used for the icon of the Win32 GUI. It can be one of
2314 these values: "Error", "Question", "Info", "Warning" or
2315 "Generic". Only the first character is relevant. When {type}
2316 is omitted, "Generic" is used.
2317 If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C,
2318 or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0.
2320 An example: >
2321 :let choice = confirm("What do you want?", "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2)
2322 :if choice == 0
2323 : echo "make up your mind!"
2324 :elseif choice == 3
2325 : echo "tasteful"
2326 :else
2327 : echo "I prefer bananas myself."
2328 :endif
2329 < In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons
2330 depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included,
2331 the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm()
2332 tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they
2333 don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems
2334 the horizontal layout is always used.
2336 *copy()*
2337 copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't
2338 different from using {expr} directly.
2339 When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means
2340 that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
2341 copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus
2342 changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|. Also
2343 see |deepcopy()|.
2345 cos({expr}) *cos()*
2346 Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
2347 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
2348 Examples: >
2349 :echo cos(100)
2350 < 0.862319 >
2351 :echo cos(-4.01)
2352 < -0.646043
2353 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
2356 count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()*
2357 Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
2358 in |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
2359 If {start} is given then start with the item with this index.
2360 {start} can only be used with a |List|.
2361 When {ic} is given and it's non-zero then case is ignored.
2364 *cscope_connection()*
2365 cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
2366 Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no
2367 parameters are specified, then the function returns:
2368 0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or
2369 if there are no cscope connections;
2370 1, if there is at least one cscope connection.
2372 If parameters are specified, then the value of {num}
2373 determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked:
2375 {num} Description of existence check
2376 ----- ------------------------------
2377 0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()").
2378 1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for
2379 {dbpath}.
2380 2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for
2381 {dbpath}.
2382 3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both
2383 {dbpath} and {prepend}.
2384 4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both
2385 {dbpath} and {prepend}.
2387 Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive!
2389 Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): >
2391 # pid database name prepend path
2392 0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local
2393 <
2394 Invocation Return Val ~
2395 ---------- ---------- >
2396 cscope_connection() 1
2397 cscope_connection(1, "out") 1
2398 cscope_connection(2, "out") 0
2399 cscope_connection(3, "out") 0
2400 cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1
2401 cscope_connection(4, "out") 0
2402 cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0
2403 cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1
2404 <
2405 cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()*
2406 cursor({list})
2407 Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the
2408 line {lnum}. The first column is one.
2409 When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
2410 with two or three items {lnum}, {col} and {off}. This is like
2411 the return value of |getpos()|, but without the first item.
2412 Does not change the jumplist.
2413 If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
2414 the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
2415 If {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line.
2416 If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line,
2417 the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
2418 line.
2419 If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
2420 When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
2421 screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a
2422 position within a <Tab> or after the last character.
2423 Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
2426 deepcopy({expr}[, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698*
2427 Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't
2428 different from using {expr} directly.
2429 When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means
2430 that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
2431 copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List|, a copy for it
2432 is made, recursively. Thus changing an item in the copy does
2433 not change the contents of the original |List|.
2434 When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or
2435 |Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to
2436 this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a
2437 |List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means
2438 that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail.
2439 *E724*
2440 Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item
2441 that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with
2442 {noref} set to 1 will fail.
2443 Also see |copy()|.
2445 delete({fname}) *delete()*
2446 Deletes the file by the name {fname}. The result is a Number,
2447 which is 0 if the file was deleted successfully, and non-zero
2448 when the deletion failed.
2449 Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|.
2451 *did_filetype()*
2452 did_filetype() Returns non-zero when autocommands are being executed and the
2453 FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used
2454 to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts
2455 that detect the file type. |FileType|
2456 When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this
2457 really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the
2458 current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts
2459 editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax
2460 file.
2462 diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()*
2463 Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}.
2464 These are the lines that were inserted at this point in
2465 another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the
2466 display but don't exist in the buffer.
2467 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
2468 line, "'m" mark m, etc.
2469 Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode.
2471 diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()*
2472 Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column
2473 {col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a
2474 diff change zero is returned.
2475 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
2476 line, "'m" mark m, etc.
2477 {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
2478 line.
2479 The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain
2480 syntax information about the highlighting.
2482 empty({expr}) *empty()*
2483 Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise.
2484 A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any
2485 items. A Number is empty when its value is zero.
2486 For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the
2487 length with zero.
2489 escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()*
2490 Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a
2491 backslash. Example: >
2492 :echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \')
2493 < results in: >
2494 c:\\program\ files\\vim
2495 < Also see |shellescape()|.
2497 *eval()*
2498 eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to
2499 turn the result of |string()| back into the original value.
2500 This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings and composites of
2501 them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing
2502 functions.
2504 eventhandler() *eventhandler()*
2505 Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got
2506 interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character,
2507 e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive
2508 commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned.
2510 executable({expr}) *executable()*
2511 This function checks if an executable with the name {expr}
2512 exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any
2513 arguments.
2514 executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal
2515 searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT*
2516 On MS-DOS and MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can
2517 optionally be included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are
2518 tried. Thus if "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be
2519 found. If $PATHEXT is not set then ".exe;.com;.bat;.cmd" is
2520 used. A dot by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using
2521 the name without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a
2522 Unix shell, then the name is also tried without adding an
2523 extension.
2524 On MS-DOS and MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and
2525 is not a directory, not if it's really executable.
2526 On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is
2527 always found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it
2528 should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|.
2529 The result is a Number:
2530 1 exists
2531 0 does not exist
2532 -1 not implemented on this system
2534 *exists()*
2535 exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is
2536 defined, zero otherwise. The {expr} argument is a string,
2537 which contains one of these:
2538 &option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists,
2539 not if it really works)
2540 +option-name Vim option that works.
2541 $ENVNAME environment variable (could also be
2542 done by comparing with an empty
2543 string)
2544 *funcname built-in function (see |functions|)
2545 or user defined function (see
2546 |user-functions|).
2547 varname internal variable (see
2548 |internal-variables|). Also works
2549 for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary|
2550 entries, |List| items, etc. Beware
2551 that evaluating an index may cause an
2552 error message for an invalid
2553 expression. E.g.: >
2554 :let l = [1, 2, 3]
2555 :echo exists("l[5]")
2556 < 0 >
2557 :echo exists("l[xx]")
2558 < E121: Undefined variable: xx
2559 0
2560 :cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user
2561 command or command modifier |:command|.
2562 Returns:
2563 1 for match with start of a command
2564 2 full match with a command
2565 3 matches several user commands
2566 To check for a supported command
2567 always check the return value to be 2.
2568 :2match The |:2match| command.
2569 :3match The |:3match| command.
2570 #event autocommand defined for this event
2571 #event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and
2572 pattern (the pattern is taken
2573 literally and compared to the
2574 autocommand patterns character by
2575 character)
2576 #group autocommand group exists
2577 #group#event autocommand defined for this group and
2578 event.
2579 #group#event#pattern
2580 autocommand defined for this group,
2581 event and pattern.
2582 ##event autocommand for this event is
2583 supported.
2584 For checking for a supported feature use |has()|.
2586 Examples: >
2587 exists("&shortname")
2588 exists("$HOSTNAME")
2589 exists("*strftime")
2590 exists("*s:MyFunc")
2591 exists("bufcount")
2592 exists(":Make")
2593 exists("#CursorHold")
2594 exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz")
2595 exists("#filetypeindent")
2596 exists("#filetypeindent#FileType")
2597 exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*")
2598 exists("##ColorScheme")
2599 < There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the
2600 name.
2601 There must be no extra characters after the name, although in
2602 a few cases this is ignored. That may become more strict in
2603 the future, thus don't count on it!
2604 Working example: >
2605 exists(":make")
2606 < NOT working example: >
2607 exists(":make install")
2609 < Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the
2610 variable itself. For example: >
2611 exists(bufcount)
2612 < This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable,
2613 but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists.
2615 expand({expr} [, {flag}]) *expand()*
2616 Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}.
2617 The result is a String.
2619 When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
2620 characters. [Note: in version 5.0 a space was used, which
2621 caused problems when a file name contains a space]
2623 If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name
2624 for a non-existing file is not included.
2626 When {expr} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is done
2627 like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their associated
2628 modifiers. Here is a short overview:
2630 % current file name
2631 # alternate file name
2632 #n alternate file name n
2633 <cfile> file name under the cursor
2634 <afile> autocmd file name
2635 <abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!)
2636 <amatch> autocmd matched name
2637 <sfile> sourced script file name
2638 <cword> word under the cursor
2639 <cWORD> WORD under the cursor
2640 <client> the {clientid} of the last received
2641 message |server2client()|
2642 Modifiers:
2643 :p expand to full path
2644 :h head (last path component removed)
2645 :t tail (last path component only)
2646 :r root (one extension removed)
2647 :e extension only
2649 Example: >
2650 :let &tags = expand("%:p:h") . "/tags"
2651 < Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or
2652 '<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: >
2653 :let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak")
2654 < Use this: >
2655 :let doeswork = expand("%:h") . ".bak"
2656 < Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the
2657 referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>"
2658 is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the
2659 "~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: >
2660 :echo expand(expand("<cfile>"))
2661 <
2662 There cannot be white space between the variables and the
2663 following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used
2664 to modify normal file names.
2666 When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name
2667 is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a
2668 buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a
2669 '/' added.
2671 When {expr} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is
2672 expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
2673 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
2674 {flag} argument is given and it is non-zero. Names for
2675 non-existing files are included. The "**" item can be used to
2676 search in a directory tree. For example, to find all "README"
2677 files in the current directory and below: >
2678 :echo expand("**/README")
2679 <
2680 Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
2681 variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be
2682 slow, because a shell must be started. See |expr-env-expand|.
2683 The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file
2684 names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is
2685 left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in
2686 "$FOOBAR".
2688 See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for
2689 getting the raw output of an external command.
2691 extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()*
2692 {expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both
2693 |Dictionaries|.
2695 If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}.
2696 If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before item
2697 {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero insert before the
2698 first item. When {expr3} is equal to len({expr1}) then
2699 {expr2} is appended.
2700 Examples: >
2701 :echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5]))
2702 :call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1)
2703 < When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of
2704 items copied is equal to the original length of the List.
2705 E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item
2706 (where N is the original length of the List).
2707 Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate
2708 two lists into a new list use the + operator: >
2709 :let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5]
2710 <
2711 If they are |Dictionaries|:
2712 Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}.
2713 If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is
2714 used to decide what to do:
2715 {expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1}
2716 {expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2}
2717 {expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737*
2718 When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed.
2720 {expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary
2721 make a copy of {expr1} first.
2722 {expr2} remains unchanged.
2723 Returns {expr1}.
2726 feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()*
2727 Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
2728 come from a mapping or were typed by the user. They are added
2729 to the end of the typeahead buffer, thus if a mapping is still
2730 being executed these characters come after them.
2731 The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in
2732 {string}.
2733 To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes
2734 and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example,
2735 feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But
2736 feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters.
2737 If {mode} is absent, keys are remapped.
2738 {mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
2739 'm' Remap keys. This is default.
2740 'n' Do not remap keys.
2741 't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as
2742 if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo,
2743 opening folds, etc.
2744 Return value is always 0.
2746 filereadable({file}) *filereadable()*
2747 The result is a Number, which is TRUE when a file with the
2748 name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist,
2749 or is a directory, the result is FALSE. {file} is any
2750 expression, which is used as a String.
2751 If you don't care about the file being readable you can use
2752 |glob()|.
2753 *file_readable()*
2754 Obsolete name: file_readable().
2757 filewritable({file}) *filewritable()*
2758 The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the
2759 name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't
2760 exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a
2761 directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2.
2764 filter({expr}, {string}) *filter()*
2765 {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
2766 For each item in {expr} evaluate {string} and when the result
2767 is zero remove the item from the |List| or |Dictionary|.
2768 Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item.
2769 For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item.
2770 Examples: >
2771 :call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"')
2772 < Removes the items where "OLD" appears. >
2773 :call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8')
2774 < Removes the items with a key below 8. >
2775 :call filter(var, 0)
2776 < Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|.
2778 Note that {string} is the result of expression and is then
2779 used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a
2780 |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.
2782 The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or
2783 |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
2784 :let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"')
2786 < Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
2787 When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no
2788 further items in {expr} are processed.
2791 finddir({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *finddir()*
2792 Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and
2793 upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching|
2794 for the syntax of {path}.
2795 Returns the path of the first found match. When the found
2796 directory is below the current directory a relative path is
2797 returned. Otherwise a full path is returned.
2798 If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used.
2799 If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of
2800 {name} in {path} instead of the first one.
2801 When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
2802 This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|.
2803 {only available when compiled with the +file_in_path feature}
2805 findfile({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *findfile()*
2806 Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
2807 Uses 'suffixesadd'.
2808 Example: >
2809 :echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
2810 < Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until
2811 it finds the file "tags.vim".
2813 float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()*
2814 Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the
2815 decimal point.
2816 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a Number.
2817 When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the
2818 result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff. NaN results
2819 in -0x80000000.
2820 Examples: >
2821 echo float2nr(3.95)
2822 < 3 >
2823 echo float2nr(-23.45)
2824 < -23 >
2825 echo float2nr(1.0e100)
2826 < 2147483647 >
2827 echo float2nr(-1.0e150)
2828 < -2147483647 >
2829 echo float2nr(1.0e-100)
2830 < 0
2831 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
2834 floor({expr}) *floor()*
2835 Return the largest integral value less than or equal to
2836 {expr} as a |Float| (round down).
2837 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
2838 Examples: >
2839 echo floor(1.856)
2840 < 1.0 >
2841 echo floor(-5.456)
2842 < -6.0 >
2843 echo floor(4.0)
2844 < 4.0
2845 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
2847 fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()*
2848 Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All
2849 characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|'
2850 are escaped with a backslash.
2851 For most systems the characters escaped are
2852 " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash
2853 appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'.
2854 A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit|
2855 and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|).
2856 Example: >
2857 :let fname = '+some str%nge|name'
2858 :exe "edit " . fnameescape(fname)
2859 < results in executing: >
2860 edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name
2862 fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()*
2863 Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a
2864 string of characters like it is used for file names on the
2865 command line. See |filename-modifiers|.
2866 Example: >
2867 :echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h")
2868 < results in: >
2869 /home/mool/vim/vim/src
2870 < Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use
2871 |expand()| first then.
2873 foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()*
2874 The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed
2875 fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold.
2876 If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
2878 foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()*
2879 The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed
2880 fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold.
2881 If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
2883 foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()*
2884 The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum}
2885 in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is
2886 returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is
2887 returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed.
2888 When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is
2889 returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the
2890 foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the
2891 previous line is usually available.
2893 *foldtext()*
2894 foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is
2895 the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should
2896 only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the
2897 |v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables.
2898 The returned string looks like this: >
2899 +-- 45 lines: abcdef
2900 < The number of dashes depends on the foldlevel. The "45" is
2901 the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text in the
2902 first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space, "//"
2903 or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and 'commentstring'
2904 options is removed.
2905 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
2907 foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()*
2908 Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line
2909 {lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context.
2910 When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is
2911 returned.
2912 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
2913 line, "'m" mark m, etc.
2914 Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML.
2915 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
2917 *foreground()*
2918 foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from
2919 a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()|
2920 On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always
2921 allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use
2922 |remote_foreground()| instead.
2923 {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
2924 Win32 console version}
2927 function({name}) *function()* *E700*
2928 Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}.
2929 {name} can be a user defined function or an internal function.
2932 garbagecollect([at_exit]) *garbagecollect()*
2933 Cleanup unused |Lists| and |Dictionaries| that have circular
2934 references. There is hardly ever a need to invoke this
2935 function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of
2936 memory or is waiting for the user to press a key after
2937 'updatetime'. Items without circular references are always
2938 freed when they become unused.
2939 This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or
2940 |Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs
2941 for a long time.
2942 When the optional "at_exit" argument is one, garbage
2943 collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't
2944 done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks.
2946 get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()*
2947 Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not
2948 available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is
2949 omitted.
2950 get({dict}, {key} [, {default}])
2951 Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this
2952 item is not available return {default}. Return zero when
2953 {default} is omitted.
2955 *getbufline()*
2956 getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
2957 Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end}
2958 (inclusive) in the buffer {expr}. If {end} is omitted, a
2959 |List| with only the line {lnum} is returned.
2961 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
2963 For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the
2964 buffer. Otherwise a number must be used.
2966 When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
2967 lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned.
2969 When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
2970 it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the
2971 buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is
2972 returned.
2974 This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and
2975 non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned.
2977 Example: >
2978 :let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$")
2980 getbufvar({expr}, {varname}) *getbufvar()*
2981 The result is the value of option or local buffer variable
2982 {varname} in buffer {expr}. Note that the name without "b:"
2983 must be used.
2984 When {varname} is empty returns a dictionary with all the
2985 buffer-local variables.
2986 This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it
2987 doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or
2988 window-local option.
2989 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
2990 When the buffer or variable doesn't exist an empty string is
2991 returned, there is no error message.
2992 Examples: >
2993 :let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod")
2994 :echo "todo myvar = " . getbufvar("todo", "myvar")
2995 <
2996 getchar([expr]) *getchar()*
2997 Get a single character from the user or input stream.
2998 If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
2999 If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available.
3000 Return zero otherwise.
3001 If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is
3002 not consumed. Return zero if no character available.
3004 Without {expr} and when {expr} is 0 a whole character or
3005 special key is returned. If it is an 8-bit character, the
3006 result is a number. Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
3007 Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character.
3008 For a special key it's a sequence of bytes starting with 0x80
3009 (decimal: 128). This is the same value as the string
3010 "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is also a
3011 String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is
3012 not included in the character.
3014 When {expr} is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a
3015 one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
3016 Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
3018 When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be
3019 returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|,
3020 |v:mouse_lnum| and |v:mouse_win|. This example positions the
3021 mouse as it would normally happen: >
3022 let c = getchar()
3023 if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0
3024 exe v:mouse_win . "wincmd w"
3025 exe v:mouse_lnum
3026 exe "normal " . v:mouse_col . "|"
3027 endif
3028 <
3029 There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the
3030 user that a character has to be typed.
3031 There is no mapping for the character.
3032 Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del>
3033 key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character
3034 sequence. Examples: >
3035 getchar() == "\<Del>"
3036 getchar() == "\<S-Left>"
3037 < This example redefines "f" to ignore case: >
3038 :nmap f :call FindChar()<CR>
3039 :function FindChar()
3040 : let c = nr2char(getchar())
3041 : while col('.') < col('$') - 1
3042 : normal l
3043 : if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c
3044 : break
3045 : endif
3046 : endwhile
3047 :endfunction
3049 getcharmod() *getcharmod()*
3050 The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for
3051 the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way.
3052 These values are added together:
3053 2 shift
3054 4 control
3055 8 alt (meta)
3056 16 mouse double click
3057 32 mouse triple click
3058 64 mouse quadruple click
3059 128 Macintosh only: command
3060 Only the modifiers that have not been included in the
3061 character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A"
3062 without a modifier.
3064 getcmdline() *getcmdline()*
3065 Return the current command-line. Only works when the command
3066 line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or
3067 |c_CTRL-R_=|.
3068 Example: >
3069 :cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR>
3070 < Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()| and |setcmdpos()|.
3072 getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()*
3073 Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
3074 byte count. The first column is 1.
3075 Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
3076 |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Returns 0 otherwise.
3077 Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
3079 getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()*
3080 Return the current command-line type. Possible return values
3081 are:
3082 : normal Ex command
3083 > debug mode command |debug-mode|
3084 / forward search command
3085 ? backward search command
3086 @ |input()| command
3087 - |:insert| or |:append| command
3088 Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
3089 |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Returns an empty string
3090 otherwise.
3091 Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
3093 *getcwd()*
3094 getcwd() The result is a String, which is the name of the current
3095 working directory.
3097 getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()*
3098 The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the
3099 given file {fname}.
3100 If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned.
3101 If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned.
3102 If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2
3103 is returned.
3105 getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()*
3106 Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being
3107 used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group
3108 |hl-Normal|.
3109 With an argument a check is done whether {name} is a valid
3110 font name. If not then an empty string is returned.
3111 Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the
3112 GUI does not support obtaining the real name.
3113 Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or
3114 gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this
3115 function just after the GUI has started.
3116 Note that the GTK 2 GUI accepts any font name, thus checking
3117 for a valid name does not work.
3119 getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()*
3120 The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute
3121 permissions of the given file {fname}.
3122 If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an
3123 empty string is returned.
3124 The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of
3125 "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
3126 of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
3127 If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
3128 is replaced with the string "-". Example: >
3129 :echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
3130 < This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
3131 the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
3133 getftime({fname}) *getftime()*
3134 The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of
3135 the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds
3136 since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also
3137 |localtime()| and |strftime()|.
3138 If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned.
3140 getftype({fname}) *getftype()*
3141 The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of
3142 file of the given file {fname}.
3143 If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned.
3144 Here is a table over different kinds of files and their
3145 results:
3146 Normal file "file"
3147 Directory "dir"
3148 Symbolic link "link"
3149 Block device "bdev"
3150 Character device "cdev"
3151 Socket "socket"
3152 FIFO "fifo"
3153 All other "other"
3154 Example: >
3155 getftype("/home")
3156 < Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on
3157 systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and
3158 "file" are returned.
3160 *getline()*
3161 getline({lnum} [, {end}])
3162 Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum}
3163 from the current buffer. Example: >
3164 getline(1)
3165 < When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a
3166 digit, line() is called to translate the String into a Number.
3167 To get the line under the cursor: >
3168 getline(".")
3169 < When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
3170 lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned.
3172 When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is
3173 a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end},
3174 including line {end}.
3175 {end} is used in the same way as {lnum}.
3176 Non-existing lines are silently omitted.
3177 When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned.
3178 Example: >
3179 :let start = line('.')
3180 :let end = search("^$") - 1
3181 :let lines = getline(start, end)
3183 < To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()|
3185 getloclist({nr}) *getloclist()*
3186 Returns a list with all the entries in the location list for
3187 window {nr}. When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
3188 For a location list window, the displayed location list is
3189 returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is
3190 returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|.
3192 getmatches() *getmatches()*
3193 Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined by
3194 |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. |getmatches()| is
3195 useful in combination with |setmatches()|, as |setmatches()|
3196 can restore a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|.
3197 Example: >
3198 :echo getmatches()
3199 < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
3200 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
3201 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
3202 :let m = getmatches()
3203 :call clearmatches()
3204 :echo getmatches()
3205 < [] >
3206 :call setmatches(m)
3207 :echo getmatches()
3208 < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
3209 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
3210 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
3211 :unlet m
3212 <
3214 getqflist() *getqflist()*
3215 Returns a list with all the current quickfix errors. Each
3216 list item is a dictionary with these entries:
3217 bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use
3218 bufname() to get the name
3219 lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1)
3220 col column number (first column is 1)
3221 vcol non-zero: "col" is visual column
3222 zero: "col" is byte index
3223 nr error number
3224 pattern search pattern used to locate the error
3225 text description of the error
3226 type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc.
3227 valid non-zero: recognized error message
3229 When there is no error list or it's empty an empty list is
3230 returned. Quickfix list entries with non-existing buffer
3231 number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero.
3233 Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and
3234 do something with them: >
3235 :vimgrep /theword/jg *.c
3236 :for d in getqflist()
3237 : echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text
3238 :endfor
3241 getreg([{regname} [, 1]]) *getreg()*
3242 The result is a String, which is the contents of register
3243 {regname}. Example: >
3244 :let cliptext = getreg('*')
3245 < getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
3246 register. (For use in maps.)
3247 getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
3248 be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra
3249 argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
3250 If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
3253 getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()*
3254 The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}.
3255 The value will be one of:
3256 "v" for |characterwise| text
3257 "V" for |linewise| text
3258 "<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text
3259 0 for an empty or unknown register
3260 <CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
3261 If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
3263 gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}) *gettabwinvar()*
3264 Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window
3265 {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
3266 When {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a window-local
3267 option.
3268 Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage
3269 use |getwinvar()|.
3270 When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
3271 This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
3272 window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
3273 or buffer-local variable.
3274 When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all window-local
3275 variables is returned.
3276 Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:".
3277 Examples: >
3278 :let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list')
3279 :echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar')
3280 <
3281 *getwinposx()*
3282 getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
3283 the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. The result will be
3284 -1 if the information is not available.
3286 *getwinposy()*
3287 getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
3288 the top of the GUI Vim window. The result will be -1 if the
3289 information is not available.
3291 getwinvar({winnr}, {varname}) *getwinvar()*
3292 Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage.
3293 Examples: >
3294 :let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
3295 :echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
3296 <
3297 glob({expr} [, {flag}]) *glob()*
3298 Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the
3299 use of special characters.
3300 The result is a String.
3301 When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
3302 characters.
3303 Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
3304 the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
3305 one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
3306 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
3307 If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.
3308 A name for a non-existing file is not included.
3310 For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
3311 any external command. Example: >
3312 :let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`")
3313 :let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g")
3314 < The result of the program inside the backticks should be one
3315 item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed.
3317 See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See
3318 |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command.
3320 globpath({path}, {expr} [, {flag}]) *globpath()*
3321 Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate
3322 the results. Example: >
3323 :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim")
3324 < {path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each
3325 directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with
3326 |glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed.
3327 To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a
3328 backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a
3329 trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it.
3330 If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no
3331 error message.
3332 Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
3333 the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
3334 one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
3335 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
3337 The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
3338 For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
3339 in 'runtimepath' and below: >
3340 :echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt")
3341 < Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not
3342 supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly.
3344 *has()*
3345 has({feature}) The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is
3346 supported, zero otherwise. The {feature} argument is a
3347 string. See |feature-list| below.
3348 Also see |exists()|.
3351 has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()*
3352 The result is a Number, which is 1 if |Dictionary| {dict} has
3353 an entry with key {key}. Zero otherwise.
3355 haslocaldir() *haslocaldir()*
3356 The result is a Number, which is 1 when the current
3357 window has set a local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise.
3359 hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()*
3360 The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that
3361 contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to)
3362 and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by
3363 {mode}.
3364 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
3365 instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or
3366 Command-line mode.
3367 Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current
3368 buffer are checked for a match.
3369 If no matching mapping is found 0 is returned.
3370 The following characters are recognized in {mode}:
3371 n Normal mode
3372 v Visual mode
3373 o Operator-pending mode
3374 i Insert mode
3375 l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.)
3376 c Command-line mode
3377 When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used.
3379 This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists
3380 to a function in a Vim script. Example: >
3381 :if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit')
3382 : map <Leader>d \ABCdoit
3383 :endif
3384 < This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't
3385 already a mapping to "\ABCdoit".
3387 histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()*
3388 Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be
3389 one of: *hist-names*
3390 "cmd" or ":" command line history
3391 "search" or "/" search pattern history
3392 "expr" or "=" typed expression history
3393 "input" or "@" input line history
3394 If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
3395 shifted to become the newest entry.
3396 The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful,
3397 otherwise 0 is returned.
3399 Example: >
3400 :call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d"))
3401 :let date=input("Enter date: ")
3402 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
3404 histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()*
3405 Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names|
3406 for the possible values of {history}.
3408 If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a
3409 regular expression. All entries matching that expression will
3410 be removed from the history (if there are any).
3411 Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|.
3412 If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as
3413 an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will
3414 be removed if it exists.
3416 The result is a Number: 1 for a successful operation,
3417 otherwise 0 is returned.
3419 Examples:
3420 Clear expression register history: >
3421 :call histdel("expr")
3422 <
3423 Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: >
3424 :call histdel("/", '^\*')
3425 <
3426 The following three are equivalent: >
3427 :call histdel("search", histnr("search"))
3428 :call histdel("search", -1)
3429 :call histdel("search", '^'.histget("search", -1).'$')
3430 <
3431 To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for
3432 the "n" command and 'hlsearch': >
3433 :call histdel("search", -1)
3434 :let @/ = histget("search", -1)
3436 histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()*
3437 The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from
3438 {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of
3439 {history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is
3440 no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is
3441 omitted, the most recent item from the history is used.
3443 Examples:
3444 Redo the second last search from history. >
3445 :execute '/' . histget("search", -2)
3447 < Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of
3448 the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. >
3449 :command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>)
3450 <
3451 histnr({history}) *histnr()*
3452 The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}.
3453 See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}.
3454 If an error occurred, -1 is returned.
3456 Example: >
3457 :let inp_index = histnr("expr")
3458 <
3459 hlexists({name}) *hlexists()*
3460 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a highlight group
3461 called {name} exists. This is when the group has been
3462 defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has
3463 been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax
3464 item.
3465 *highlight_exists()*
3466 Obsolete name: highlight_exists().
3468 *hlID()*
3469 hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group
3470 with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist,
3471 zero is returned.
3472 This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight
3473 group. For example, to get the background color of the
3474 "Comment" group: >
3475 :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg")
3476 < *highlightID()*
3477 Obsolete name: highlightID().
3479 hostname() *hostname()*
3480 The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on
3481 which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than
3482 256 characters long are truncated.
3484 iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()*
3485 The result is a String, which is the text {expr} converted
3486 from encoding {from} to encoding {to}.
3487 When the conversion fails an empty string is returned.
3488 The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function
3489 can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv".
3490 Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv|
3491 feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back
3492 can be done.
3493 This can be used to display messages with special characters,
3494 no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in
3495 UTF-8 and use: >
3496 echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc)
3497 < Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion
3498 from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You
3499 cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes.
3500 {only available when compiled with the +multi_byte feature}
3502 *indent()*
3503 indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the
3504 current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value
3505 of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in
3506 |getline()|.
3507 When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned.
3510 index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()*
3511 Return the lowest index in |List| {list} where the item has a
3512 value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic conversion, so
3513 the String "4" is different from the Number 4. And the number
3514 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value of 'ignorecase'
3515 is not used here, case always matters.
3516 If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index
3517 {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end).
3518 When {ic} is given and it is non-zero, ignore case. Otherwise
3519 case must match.
3520 -1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {list}.
3521 Example: >
3522 :let idx = index(words, "the")
3523 :if index(numbers, 123) >= 0
3526 input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()*
3527 The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on
3528 the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt
3529 string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used
3530 in the prompt to start a new line.
3531 The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt.
3532 The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same
3533 editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history
3534 for lines typed for input().
3535 Example: >
3536 :if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer"
3537 : echo "Cheers!"
3538 :endif
3539 <
3540 If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this
3541 is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this.
3542 Example: >
3543 :let color = input("Color? ", "white")
3545 < The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of
3546 completion supported for the input. Without it completion is
3547 not performed. The supported completion types are the same as
3548 that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the
3549 "-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for
3550 more information. Example: >
3551 let fname = input("File: ", "", "file")
3552 <
3553 NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for
3554 the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI).
3555 Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will
3556 consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a
3557 mapping is handled like the characters were typed.
3558 Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()|
3559 after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid
3560 that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using
3561 |:execute| or |:normal|.
3563 Example with a mapping: >
3564 :nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" . Foo<CR>
3565 :function GetFoo()
3566 : call inputsave()
3567 : let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ")
3568 : call inputrestore()
3569 :endfunction
3571 inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()*
3572 Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
3573 are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
3574 Example: >
3575 :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", &sw)
3576 :if n != ""
3577 : let &sw = n
3578 :endif
3579 < When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When
3580 omitted an empty string is returned.
3581 Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting
3582 <Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button.
3583 NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
3585 inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()*
3586 {textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is
3587 displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to
3588 enter a number, which is returned.
3589 The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the
3590 mouse. For the first string 0 is returned. When clicking
3591 above the first item a negative number is returned. When
3592 clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist}
3593 is returned.
3594 Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise
3595 it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at
3596 the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item.
3597 Example: >
3598 let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red',
3599 \ '2. green', '3. blue'])
3601 inputrestore() *inputrestore()*
3602 Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|.
3603 Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is
3604 called. Calling it more often is harmless though.
3605 Returns 1 when there is nothing to restore, 0 otherwise.
3607 inputsave() *inputsave()*
3608 Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that
3609 a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be
3610 followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can
3611 be used several times, in which case there must be just as
3612 many inputrestore() calls.
3613 Returns 1 when out of memory, 0 otherwise.
3615 inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()*
3616 This function acts much like the |input()| function with but
3617 two exceptions:
3618 a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of
3619 asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and
3620 b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input
3621 |history| stack.
3622 The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually
3623 typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt.
3624 NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
3626 insert({list}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()*
3627 Insert {item} at the start of |List| {list}.
3628 If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index
3629 {idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just
3630 like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see
3631 |list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item.
3632 Returns the resulting |List|. Examples: >
3633 :let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1)
3634 :call insert(mylist, 4, -1)
3635 :call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist))
3636 < The last example can be done simpler with |add()|.
3637 Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single
3638 item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
3640 isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()*
3641 The result is a Number, which is non-zero when a directory
3642 with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't
3643 exist, or isn't a directory, the result is FALSE. {directory}
3644 is any expression, which is used as a String.
3646 islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786*
3647 The result is a Number, which is non-zero when {expr} is the
3648 name of a locked variable.
3649 {expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or
3650 |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself! Example: >
3651 :let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3]
3652 :lockvar 1 alist
3653 :echo islocked('alist') " 1
3654 :echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0
3656 < When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error
3657 message. Use |exists()| to check for existence.
3659 items({dict}) *items()*
3660 Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each
3661 |List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict}
3662 entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary
3663 order.
3666 join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()*
3667 Join the items in {list} together into one String.
3668 When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If
3669 {sep} is omitted a single space is used.
3670 Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to
3671 add it there too: >
3672 let lines = join(mylist, "\n") . "\n"
3673 < String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are
3674 converted into a string like with |string()|.
3675 The opposite function is |split()|.
3677 keys({dict}) *keys()*
3678 Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in
3679 arbitrary order.
3681 *len()* *E701*
3682 len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument.
3683 When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is
3684 used, as with |strlen()|.
3685 When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is
3686 returned.
3687 When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the
3688 |Dictionary| is returned.
3689 Otherwise an error is given.
3691 *libcall()* *E364* *E368*
3692 libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
3693 Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname}
3694 with single argument {argument}.
3695 This is useful to call functions in a library that you
3696 especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument
3697 is possible, calling standard library functions is rather
3698 limited.
3699 The result is the String returned by the function. If the
3700 function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string ""
3701 to Vim.
3702 If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()!
3703 If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an
3704 int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a
3705 null-terminated string.
3706 This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
3708 libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to
3709 Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a
3710 means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will
3711 very probably crash.
3713 For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL
3714 and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is
3715 used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly
3716 one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer,
3717 and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character
3718 pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid
3719 after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the
3720 DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will
3721 leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work,
3722 it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded.
3724 WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may
3725 crash! This also happens if the function returns a number,
3726 because Vim thinks it's a pointer.
3727 For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL
3728 without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if
3729 the DLL is not in the usual places.
3730 For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the
3731 object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC').
3732 {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
3733 feature is present}
3734 Examples: >
3735 :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME")
3736 <
3737 *libcallnr()*
3738 libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
3739 Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an
3740 int instead of a string.
3741 {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
3742 feature is present}
3743 Examples: >
3744 :echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "")
3745 :call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n")
3746 :call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10)
3747 <
3748 *line()*
3749 line({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
3750 position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are:
3751 . the cursor position
3752 $ the last line in the current buffer
3753 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
3754 returned)
3755 w0 first line visible in current window
3756 w$ last line visible in current window
3757 v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
3758 cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode
3759 returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in
3760 that it's updated right away.
3761 Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number
3762 then applies to another buffer.
3763 To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use
3764 |getpos()|.
3765 Examples: >
3766 line(".") line number of the cursor
3767 line("'t") line number of mark t
3768 line("'" . marker) line number of mark marker
3769 < *last-position-jump*
3770 This autocommand jumps to the last known position in a file
3771 just after opening it, if the '" mark is set: >
3772 :au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g`\"" | endif
3774 line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()*
3775 Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
3776 {lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on
3777 the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first
3778 line returns 1.
3779 This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just
3780 below the last line: >
3781 line2byte(line("$") + 1)
3782 < This is the file size plus one.
3783 When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been
3784 disabled at compile time, -1 is returned.
3785 Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|.
3787 lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()*
3788 Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp
3789 indenting rules, as with 'lisp'.
3790 The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
3791 relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
3792 When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the
3793 |+lispindent| feature, -1 is returned.
3795 localtime() *localtime()*
3796 Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan
3797 1970. See also |strftime()| and |getftime()|.
3800 log10({expr}) *log10()*
3801 Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|.
3802 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
3803 Examples: >
3804 :echo log10(1000)
3805 < 3.0 >
3806 :echo log10(0.01)
3807 < -2.0
3808 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
3810 map({expr}, {string}) *map()*
3811 {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
3812 Replace each item in {expr} with the result of evaluating
3813 {string}.
3814 Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item.
3815 For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item.
3816 Example: >
3817 :call map(mylist, '"> " . v:val . " <"')
3818 < This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist".
3820 Note that {string} is the result of an expression and is then
3821 used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a
3822 |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You
3823 still have to double ' quotes
3825 The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or
3826 |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
3827 :let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' & . "\t"')
3829 < Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
3830 When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no
3831 further items in {expr} are processed.
3834 maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *maparg()*
3835 Return the rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}. When there
3836 is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is returned.
3837 {mode} can be one of these strings:
3838 "n" Normal
3839 "v" Visual
3840 "o" Operator-pending
3841 "i" Insert
3842 "c" Cmd-line
3843 "l" langmap |language-mapping|
3844 "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
3845 When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
3846 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
3847 instead of mappings.
3848 The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
3849 command. The returned String has special characters
3850 translated like in the output of the ":map" command listing.
3851 The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
3852 then the global mappings.
3853 This function can be used to map a key even when it's already
3854 mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: >
3855 exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n')
3858 mapcheck({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()*
3859 Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode
3860 {mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in
3861 {name}.
3862 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
3863 instead of mappings.
3864 A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and
3865 with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}.
3867 matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~
3868 mapcheck("a") yes yes yes
3869 mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes
3870 mapcheck("ax") yes no no
3871 mapcheck("b") no no no
3873 The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a
3874 mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a
3875 mapping for {name} exactly.
3876 When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty
3877 String is returned. If there is one, the rhs of that mapping
3878 is returned. If there are several mappings that start with
3879 {name}, the rhs of one of them is returned.
3880 The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
3881 then the global mappings.
3882 This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added
3883 without being ambiguous. Example: >
3884 :if mapcheck("_vv") == ""
3885 : map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR>
3886 :endif
3887 < This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a
3888 mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv".
3890 match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *match()*
3891 When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the
3892 first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a
3893 String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed.
3894 Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a
3895 Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where
3896 {pat} matches.
3897 A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero.
3898 If there is no match -1 is returned.
3899 Example: >
3900 :echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4
3901 :echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1
3902 < See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
3903 *strpbrk()*
3904 Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: >
3905 :let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]')
3906 < *strcasestr()*
3907 Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add
3908 "\c" to the pattern to ignore case: >
3909 :let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle')
3910 <
3911 If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index
3912 {start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|.
3913 The result, however, is still the index counted from the
3914 first character/item. Example: >
3915 :echo match("testing", "ing", 2)
3916 < result is again "4". >
3917 :echo match("testing", "ing", 4)
3918 < result is again "4". >
3919 :echo match("testing", "t", 2)
3920 < result is "3".
3921 For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts
3922 {start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except
3923 when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the
3924 {start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it
3925 backwards compatible).
3926 For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list
3927 the index is counted from the end.
3928 If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a
3929 String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned.
3931 When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match
3932 is found in a String the search for the next one starts one
3933 character further. Thus this example results in 1: >
3934 echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2)
3935 < In a |List| the search continues in the next item.
3936 Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes,
3937 see above.
3939 See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted.
3940 The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of
3941 the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always
3942 done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
3944 *matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801*
3945 matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
3946 Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a
3947 "match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an
3948 identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the
3949 match using |matchdelete()|.
3951 The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the
3952 match. A match with a high priority will have its
3953 highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority.
3954 A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no
3955 exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the
3956 default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero,
3957 hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will
3958 overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate
3959 mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will
3960 always overrule syntax highlighting.
3962 The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific
3963 match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error
3964 message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID
3965 is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2
3966 and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|,
3967 respectively. If the {id} argument is not specified,
3968 |matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID.
3970 The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with
3971 the |:match| commands.
3973 Example: >
3974 :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
3975 :let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO")
3976 < Deletion of the pattern: >
3977 :call matchdelete(m)
3979 < A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are
3980 available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in
3981 one operation by |clearmatches()|.
3983 matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()*
3984 Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|,
3985 |:2match| or |:3match| command.
3986 Return a |List| with two elements:
3987 The name of the highlight group used
3988 The pattern used.
3989 When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|.
3990 When there is no match item set returns ['', ''].
3991 This is useful to save and restore a |:match|.
3992 Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited
3993 to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation.
3995 matchdelete({id}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803*
3996 Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()|
3997 or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful,
3998 otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can
3999 be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|.
4001 matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchend()*
4002 Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character
4003 after the match. Example: >
4004 :echo matchend("testing", "ing")
4005 < results in "7".
4006 *strspn()* *strcspn()*
4007 Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can
4008 do it with matchend(): >
4009 :let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]')
4010 :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]')
4011 < Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches.
4013 The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
4014 :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2)
4015 < results in "7". >
4016 :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5)
4017 < result is "-1".
4018 When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|.
4020 matchlist({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchlist()*
4021 Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the
4022 list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would
4023 return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc.
4024 in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an
4025 empty string is used. Example: >
4026 echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)')
4027 < Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']
4028 When there is no match an empty list is returned.
4030 matchstr({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchstr()*
4031 Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: >
4032 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing")
4033 < results in "ing".
4034 When there is no match "" is returned.
4035 The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
4036 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2)
4037 < results in "ing". >
4038 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5)
4039 < result is "".
4040 When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned.
4041 The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
4043 *max()*
4044 max({list}) Return the maximum value of all items in {list}.
4045 If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot
4046 be used as a Number this results in an error.
4047 An empty |List| results in zero.
4049 *min()*
4050 min({list}) Return the minimum value of all items in {list}.
4051 If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot
4052 be used as a Number this results in an error.
4053 An empty |List| results in zero.
4055 *mkdir()* *E739*
4056 mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
4057 Create directory {name}.
4058 If {path} is "p" then intermediate directories are created as
4059 necessary. Otherwise it must be "".
4060 If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of
4061 the new directory. The default is 0755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for
4062 the user readable for others). Use 0700 to make it unreadable
4063 for others. This is only used for the last part of {name}.
4064 Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be created
4065 with 0755.
4066 Example: >
4067 :call mkdir($HOME . "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0700)
4068 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4069 Not available on all systems. To check use: >
4070 :if exists("*mkdir")
4071 <
4072 *mode()*
4073 mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode.
4074 If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
4075 a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is
4076 returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned. Note
4077 that " " and "0" are also non-empty strings.
4079 n Normal
4080 no Operator-pending
4081 v Visual by character
4082 V Visual by line
4083 CTRL-V Visual blockwise
4084 s Select by character
4085 S Select by line
4086 CTRL-S Select blockwise
4087 i Insert
4088 R Replace |R|
4089 Rv Virtual Replace |gR|
4090 c Command-line
4091 cv Vim Ex mode |gQ|
4092 ce Normal Ex mode |Q|
4093 r Hit-enter prompt
4094 rm The -- more -- prompt
4095 r? A |:confirm| query of some sort
4096 ! Shell or external command is executing
4097 This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used
4098 with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns
4099 "c" or "n".
4100 Also see |visualmode()|.
4102 nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()*
4103 Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum}
4104 that is not blank. Example: >
4105 if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java"
4106 < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
4107 below it, zero is returned.
4108 See also |prevnonblank()|.
4110 nr2char({expr}) *nr2char()*
4111 Return a string with a single character, which has the number
4112 value {expr}. Examples: >
4113 nr2char(64) returns "@"
4114 nr2char(32) returns " "
4115 < The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": >
4116 nr2char(300) returns I with bow character
4117 < Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
4118 nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline
4119 characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
4120 string, thus results in an empty string.
4122 *getpid()*
4123 getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
4124 On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
4125 exits. On MS-DOS it's always zero.
4127 *getpos()*
4128 getpos({expr}) Get the position for {expr}. For possible values of {expr}
4129 see |line()|.
4130 The result is a |List| with four numbers:
4131 [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
4132 "bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
4133 is the buffer number of the mark.
4134 "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first
4135 column is 1.
4136 The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then
4137 it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
4138 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
4139 character.
4140 This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
4141 let save_cursor = getpos(".")
4142 MoveTheCursorAround
4143 call setpos('.', save_cursor)
4144 < Also see |setpos()|.
4146 pathshorten({expr}) *pathshorten()*
4147 Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the
4148 result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other
4149 components in the path are reduced to single letters. Leading
4150 '~' and '.' characters are kept. Example: >
4151 :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim')
4152 < ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
4153 It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
4155 pow({x}, {y}) *pow()*
4156 Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|.
4157 {x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
4158 Examples: >
4159 :echo pow(3, 3)
4160 < 27.0 >
4161 :echo pow(2, 16)
4162 < 65536.0 >
4163 :echo pow(32, 0.20)
4164 < 2.0
4165 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
4167 prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()*
4168 Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
4169 that is not blank. Example: >
4170 let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
4171 < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
4172 above it, zero is returned.
4173 Also see |nextnonblank()|.
4176 printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()*
4177 Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by
4178 the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: >
4179 printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg)
4180 < May result in:
4181 " 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~
4183 Often used items are:
4184 %s string
4185 %6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes
4186 %.9s string truncated to 9 bytes
4187 %c single byte
4188 %d decimal number
4189 %5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters
4190 %x hex number
4191 %04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters
4192 %X hex number using upper case letters
4193 %o octal number
4194 %f floating point number in the form 123.456
4195 %e floating point number in the form 1.234e3
4196 %E floating point number in the form 1.234E3
4197 %g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value
4198 %G floating point number, as %f or %E depending on value
4199 %% the % character itself
4201 Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the
4202 conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to
4203 the result.
4205 The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following
4206 arguments appear in sequence:
4208 % [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type
4210 flags
4211 Zero or more of the following flags:
4213 # The value should be converted to an "alternate
4214 form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option
4215 has no effect. For o conversions, the precision
4216 of the number is increased to force the first
4217 character of the output string to a zero (except
4218 if a zero value is printed with an explicit
4219 precision of zero).
4220 For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has
4221 the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions)
4222 prepended to it.
4224 0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted
4225 value is padded on the left with zeros rather
4226 than blanks. If a precision is given with a
4227 numeric conversion (d, o, x, and X), the 0 flag
4228 is ignored.
4230 - A negative field width flag; the converted value
4231 is to be left adjusted on the field boundary.
4232 The converted value is padded on the right with
4233 blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or
4234 zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given.
4236 ' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive
4237 number produced by a signed conversion (d).
4239 + A sign must always be placed before a number
4240 produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides
4241 a space if both are used.
4243 field-width
4244 An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum
4245 field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes
4246 than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on
4247 the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has
4248 been given) to fill out the field width.
4250 .precision
4251 An optional precision, in the form of a period '.'
4252 followed by an optional digit string. If the digit
4253 string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero.
4254 This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for
4255 d, o, x, and X conversions, or the maximum number of
4256 bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions.
4257 For floating point it is the number of digits after
4258 the decimal point.
4260 type
4261 A character that specifies the type of conversion to
4262 be applied, see below.
4264 A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
4265 asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a
4266 Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A
4267 negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag
4268 followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is
4269 treated as though it were missing. Example: >
4270 :echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line)
4271 < This limits the length of the text used from "line" to
4272 "width" bytes.
4274 The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
4276 *printf-d* *printf-o* *printf-x* *printf-X*
4277 doxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal
4278 (d), unsigned octal (o), or unsigned hexadecimal (x
4279 and X) notation. The letters "abcdef" are used for
4280 x conversions; the letters "ABCDEF" are used for X
4281 conversions.
4282 The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of
4283 digits that must appear; if the converted value
4284 requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with
4285 zeros.
4286 In no case does a non-existent or small field width
4287 cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of
4288 a conversion is wider than the field width, the field
4289 is expanded to contain the conversion result.
4291 *printf-c*
4292 c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the
4293 resulting character is written.
4295 *printf-s*
4296 s The text of the String argument is used. If a
4297 precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
4298 specified are used.
4300 *printf-f* *E807*
4301 f The Float argument is converted into a string of the
4302 form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of
4303 digits after the decimal point. When the precision is
4304 zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision
4305 is not specified 6 is used. A really big number
4306 (out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf".
4307 "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan".
4308 Example: >
4309 echo printf("%.2f", 12.115)
4310 < 12.12
4311 Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries.
4312 Use |round()| when in doubt.
4314 *printf-e* *printf-E*
4315 e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the
4316 form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The
4317 precision specifies the number of digits after the
4318 decimal point, like with 'f'.
4320 *printf-g* *printf-G*
4321 g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the
4322 value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0
4323 (exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E'
4324 for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous
4325 zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero
4326 immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0
4327 results in 1.0e7.
4329 *printf-%*
4330 % A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The
4331 complete conversion specification is "%%".
4333 When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also
4334 accepted and automatically converted.
4335 When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument
4336 is also accepted and automatically converted.
4337 Any other argument type results in an error message.
4339 *E766* *E767*
4340 The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number
4341 of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many
4342 arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used.
4345 pumvisible() *pumvisible()*
4346 Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero
4347 otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|.
4348 This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
4349 popup menu.
4351 *E726* *E727*
4352 range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()*
4353 Returns a |List| with Numbers:
4354 - If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1]
4355 - If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}]
4356 - If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ...,
4357 {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not
4358 producing a value past {max}).
4359 When the maximum is one before the start the result is an
4360 empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the
4361 start this is an error.
4362 Examples: >
4363 range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3]
4364 range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4]
4365 range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8]
4366 range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2]
4367 range(0) " []
4368 range(2, 0) " error!
4369 <
4370 *readfile()*
4371 readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
4372 Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file
4373 as an item. Lines broken at NL characters. Macintosh files
4374 separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a
4375 NL appears somewhere).
4376 When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used:
4377 - When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
4378 added.
4379 - No CR characters are removed.
4380 Otherwise:
4381 - CR characters that appear before a NL are removed.
4382 - Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter.
4383 All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
4384 When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines
4385 to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten
4386 lines of a file: >
4387 :for line in readfile(fname, '', 10)
4388 : if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif
4389 :endfor
4390 < When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file
4391 are returned, or as many as there are.
4392 When {max} is zero the result is an empty list.
4393 Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory.
4394 Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a
4395 file into a buffer if you need to.
4396 When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
4397 the result is an empty list.
4398 Also see |writefile()|.
4400 reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) *reltime()*
4401 Return an item that represents a time value. The format of
4402 the item depends on the system. It can be passed to
4403 |reltimestr()| to convert it to a string.
4404 Without an argument it returns the current time.
4405 With one argument is returns the time passed since the time
4406 specified in the argument.
4407 With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start}
4408 and {end}.
4409 The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
4410 reltime().
4411 {only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
4413 reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()*
4414 Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
4415 This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of
4416 microseconds. Example: >
4417 let start = reltime()
4418 call MyFunction()
4419 echo reltimestr(reltime(start))
4420 < Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time.
4421 The accuracy depends on the system.
4422 Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You
4423 can use split() to remove it. >
4424 echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0]
4425 < Also see |profiling|.
4426 {only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
4428 *remote_expr()* *E449*
4429 remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
4430 Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as an
4431 expression and the result is returned after evaluation.
4432 The result must be a String or a |List|. A |List| is turned
4433 into a String by joining the items with a line break in
4434 between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n").
4435 If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a
4436 variable and a {serverid} for later use with
4437 remote_read() is stored there.
4438 See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
4439 This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4440 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
4441 Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued
4442 and the result will be the empty string.
4443 Examples: >
4444 :echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2")
4445 :echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax")
4446 <
4448 remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()*
4449 Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground.
4450 This works like: >
4451 remote_expr({server}, "foreground()")
4452 < Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work
4453 around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server
4454 to bring itself to the foreground.
4455 Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized,
4456 like foreground() does.
4457 This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4458 {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
4459 Win32 console version}
4462 remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()*
4463 Returns a positive number if there are available strings
4464 from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable
4465 {retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the
4466 name of a variable.
4467 Returns zero if none are available.
4468 Returns -1 if something is wrong.
4469 See also |clientserver|.
4470 This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4471 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
4472 Examples: >
4473 :let repl = ""
4474 :echo "PEEK: ".remote_peek(id, "repl").": ".repl
4476 remote_read({serverid}) *remote_read()*
4477 Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume
4478 it. It blocks until a reply is available.
4479 See also |clientserver|.
4480 This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4481 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
4482 Example: >
4483 :echo remote_read(id)
4484 <
4485 *remote_send()* *E241*
4486 remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
4487 Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as input
4488 keys and the function returns immediately. At the Vim server
4489 the keys are not mapped |:map|.
4490 If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable
4491 and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored
4492 there.
4493 See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
4494 This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4495 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
4496 Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess
4497 up the display.
4498 Examples: >
4499 :echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply ".file, "serverid").
4500 \ remote_read(serverid)
4502 :autocmd NONE RemoteReply *
4503 \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>"))
4504 :echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo ".
4505 \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>')
4506 <
4507 remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) *remove()*
4508 Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and
4509 return the item.
4510 With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
4511 return a List with these items. When {idx} points to the same
4512 item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end}
4513 points to an item before {idx} this is an error.
4514 See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}.
4515 Example: >
4516 :echo "last item: " . remove(mylist, -1)
4517 :call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
4518 remove({dict}, {key})
4519 Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key}. Example: >
4520 :echo "removed " . remove(dict, "one")
4521 < If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error.
4523 Use |delete()| to remove a file.
4525 rename({from}, {to}) *rename()*
4526 Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This
4527 should also work to move files across file systems. The
4528 result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed
4529 successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed.
4530 NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning.
4531 This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4533 repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()*
4534 Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated
4535 result. Example: >
4536 :let separator = repeat('-', 80)
4537 < When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty.
4538 When {expr} is a |List| the result is {expr} concatenated
4539 {count} times. Example: >
4540 :let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3)
4541 < Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b'].
4544 resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655*
4545 On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file),
4546 returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form.
4547 On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path
4548 components of {filename} and return the simplified result.
4549 To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is
4550 stopped after 100 iterations.
4551 On other systems, return the simplified {filename}.
4552 The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|.
4553 resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the
4554 current directory (provided the result is still a relative
4555 path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator.
4557 *reverse()*
4558 reverse({list}) Reverse the order of items in {list} in-place. Returns
4559 {list}.
4560 If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
4561 :let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist))
4563 round({expr}) *round()*
4564 Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it
4565 as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral
4566 values, then use the larger one (away from zero).
4567 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
4568 Examples: >
4569 echo round(0.456)
4570 < 0.0 >
4571 echo round(4.5)
4572 < 5.0 >
4573 echo round(-4.5)
4574 < -5.0
4575 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
4578 search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *search()*
4579 Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the
4580 cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
4582 {flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
4583 'b' search backward instead of forward
4584 'c' accept a match at the cursor position
4585 'e' move to the End of the match
4586 'n' do Not move the cursor
4587 'p' return number of matching sub-pattern (see below)
4588 's' set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
4589 'w' wrap around the end of the file
4590 'W' don't wrap around the end of the file
4591 If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
4593 If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
4594 cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n'
4595 flag.
4597 'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used.
4599 When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops
4600 after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the
4601 search to a range of lines. Examples: >
4602 let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0"))
4603 let end = search('END', '', line("w$"))
4604 < When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies
4605 that the search does not wrap around the end of the file.
4606 A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.
4608 When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
4609 more than this many milli seconds have passed. Thus when
4610 {timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
4611 The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not
4612 giving the argument.
4613 {only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
4615 If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
4616 move. No error message is given.
4617 When a match has been found its line number is returned.
4618 *search()-sub-match*
4619 With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
4620 first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the
4621 whole pattern did match.
4622 To get the column number too use |searchpos()|.
4624 The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
4625 flag is used.
4627 Example (goes over all files in the argument list): >
4628 :let n = 1
4629 :while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist
4630 : exe "argument " . n
4631 : " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the
4632 : " first search to find match at start of file
4633 : normal G$
4634 : let flags = "w"
4635 : while search("foo", flags) > 0
4636 : s/foo/bar/g
4637 : let flags = "W"
4638 : endwhile
4639 : update " write the file if modified
4640 : let n = n + 1
4641 :endwhile
4642 <
4643 Example for using some flags: >
4644 :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe')
4645 < This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif"
4646 under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it
4647 returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0
4648 if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the
4649 line:
4650 if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~
4651 the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function
4652 finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens
4653 without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if".
4654 The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor.
4657 searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()*
4658 Search for the declaration of {name}.
4660 With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find
4661 first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find
4662 first match in the function.
4664 With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block
4665 that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids
4666 finding variable declarations only valid in another scope.
4668 Moves the cursor to the found match.
4669 Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
4670 Example: >
4671 if searchdecl('myvar') == 0
4672 echo getline('.')
4673 endif
4674 <
4675 *searchpair()*
4676 searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
4677 [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
4678 Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be
4679 used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other
4680 if/endif pairs in between are ignored.
4681 The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search
4682 forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward.
4683 If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the
4684 line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is
4685 returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is
4686 given.
4688 {start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They
4689 must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When
4690 {middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either
4691 direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A
4692 typical use is: >
4693 searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>')
4694 < By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped.
4696 {flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with
4697 |search()|. Additionally:
4698 'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the
4699 outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag.
4700 'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with
4701 the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used.
4702 Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to
4703 avoid wrapping around the end of the file.
4705 When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the
4706 {skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on
4707 the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this
4708 match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment
4709 or a string.
4710 When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
4711 When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
4712 and -1 returned.
4714 For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|.
4716 The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the
4717 patterns are used like it's on.
4719 The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with
4720 {start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the
4721 direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: >
4722 if 1
4723 if 2
4724 endif 2
4725 endif 1
4726 < When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and
4727 searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on
4728 the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be
4729 found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and
4730 then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to
4731 "endif 2".
4732 When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character,
4733 it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so
4734 that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds
4735 the matching start.
4737 Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: >
4739 :echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W',
4740 \ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""')
4742 < The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is
4743 to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid
4744 having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only
4745 catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command.
4746 Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a
4747 match.
4748 Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": >
4750 :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW')
4752 < This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a
4753 match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax
4754 highlighting recognized as strings: >
4756 :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW',
4757 \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"')
4758 <
4759 *searchpairpos()*
4760 searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
4761 [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
4762 Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
4763 column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
4764 is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
4765 the column position of the match. If no match is found,
4766 returns [0, 0].
4767 >
4768 :let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n')
4769 <
4770 See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example.
4772 searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *searchpos()*
4773 Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
4774 column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
4775 is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
4776 the column position of the match. If no match is found,
4777 returns [0, 0].
4778 Example: >
4779 :let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
4781 < When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with
4782 the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: >
4783 :let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np')
4784 < In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
4785 found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
4787 server2client( {clientid}, {string}) *server2client()*
4788 Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid}
4789 that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
4790 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
4791 Note:
4792 This id has to be stored before the next command can be
4793 received. I.e. before returning from the received command and
4794 before calling any commands that waits for input.
4795 See also |clientserver|.
4796 Example: >
4797 :echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")
4798 <
4799 serverlist() *serverlist()*
4800 Return a list of available server names, one per line.
4801 When there are no servers or the information is not available
4802 an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|.
4803 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
4804 Example: >
4805 :echo serverlist()
4806 <
4807 setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()*
4808 Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {expr} to
4809 {val}.
4810 This also works for a global or local window option, but it
4811 doesn't work for a global or local window variable.
4812 For a local window option the global value is unchanged.
4813 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
4814 Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used.
4815 Examples: >
4816 :call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1)
4817 :call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar")
4818 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4820 setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()*
4821 Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position
4822 {pos}. The first position is 1.
4823 Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position.
4824 Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use
4825 |c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For
4826 |c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is
4827 set after the command line is set to the expression. For
4828 |c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but
4829 before inserting the resulting text.
4830 When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the
4831 line. A number smaller than one has undefined results.
4832 Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command
4833 line.
4835 setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()*
4836 Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.
4837 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
4838 When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
4839 added as a new line.
4840 If this succeeds, 0 is returned. If this fails (most likely
4841 because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned. Example: >
4842 :call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
4843 < When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines
4844 will be set to the items in the list. Example: >
4845 :call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
4846 < This is equivalent to: >
4847 :for [n, l] in [[5, 6, 7], ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']]
4848 : call setline(n, l)
4849 :endfor
4850 < Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
4852 setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}]) *setloclist()*
4853 Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}.
4854 When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location
4855 list window, the displayed location list is modified. For an
4856 invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned.
4857 Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|.
4858 Also see |location-list|.
4860 setmatches({list}) *setmatches()*
4861 Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. Returns 0
4862 if successful, otherwise -1. All current matches are cleared
4863 before the list is restored. See example for |getmatches()|.
4865 *setpos()*
4866 setpos({expr}, {list})
4867 Set the position for {expr}. Possible values:
4868 . the cursor
4869 'x mark x
4871 {list} must be a |List| with four numbers:
4872 [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
4874 "bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the
4875 current buffer. Setting the cursor is only possible for
4876 the current buffer. To set a mark in another buffer you can
4877 use the |bufnr()| function to turn a file name into a buffer
4878 number.
4879 Does not change the jumplist.
4881 "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first
4882 column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark.
4884 The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then
4885 it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
4886 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
4887 character.
4889 Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
4890 An error message is given if {expr} is invalid.
4892 Also see |getpos()|
4894 This does not restore the preferred column for moving
4895 vertically. See |winrestview()| for that.
4898 setqflist({list} [, {action}]) *setqflist()*
4899 Create or replace or add to the quickfix list using the items
4900 in {list}. Each item in {list} is a dictionary.
4901 Non-dictionary items in {list} are ignored. Each dictionary
4902 item can contain the following entries:
4904 bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid
4905 buffer
4906 filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not
4907 present or it is invalid.
4908 lnum line number in the file
4909 pattern search pattern used to locate the error
4910 col column number
4911 vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column
4912 when zero: "col" is byte index
4913 nr error number
4914 text description of the error
4915 type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc.
4917 The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are
4918 optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to
4919 locate a matching error line.
4920 If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or
4921 neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the
4922 item will not be handled as an error line.
4923 If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
4924 be used.
4925 Note that the list is not exactly the same as what
4926 |getqflist()| returns.
4928 If {action} is set to 'a', then the items from {list} are
4929 added to the existing quickfix list. If there is no existing
4930 list, then a new list is created. If {action} is set to 'r',
4931 then the items from the current quickfix list are replaced
4932 with the items from {list}. If {action} is not present or is
4933 set to ' ', then a new list is created.
4935 Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
4937 This function can be used to create a quickfix list
4938 independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like
4939 ":cc 1" to jump to the first position.
4942 *setreg()*
4943 setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
4944 Set the register {regname} to {value}.
4945 If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
4946 then the value is appended.
4947 {options} can also contains a register type specification:
4948 "c" or "v" |characterwise| mode
4949 "l" or "V" |linewise| mode
4950 "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode
4951 If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is
4952 used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified
4953 then the width of the block is set to the number of characters
4954 in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character).
4956 If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
4957 is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>.
4958 Setting the '=' register is not possible.
4959 Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
4961 Examples: >
4962 :call setreg(v:register, @*)
4963 :call setreg('*', @%, 'ac')
4964 :call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
4966 < This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
4967 register. >
4968 :let var_a = getreg('a', 1)
4969 :let var_amode = getregtype('a')
4970 ....
4971 :call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
4973 < You can also change the type of a register by appending
4974 nothing: >
4975 :call setreg('a', '', 'al')
4977 settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()*
4978 Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
4979 {val}.
4980 Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage
4981 use |setwinvar()|.
4982 When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
4983 This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
4984 doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
4985 For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
4986 Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used.
4987 Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger
4988 TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands.
4989 Examples: >
4990 :call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0)
4991 :call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar")
4992 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
4994 setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()*
4995 Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page.
4996 Examples: >
4997 :call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0)
4998 :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar")
5000 shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()*
5001 Escape {string} for use as shell command argument.
5002 On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, when 'shellslash' is not set, it
5003 will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double
5004 quotes within {string}.
5005 For other systems, it will enclose {string} in single quotes
5006 and replace all "'" with "'\''".
5007 When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero
5008 Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special
5009 items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by
5010 a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!|
5011 command.
5012 The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg|
5013 {special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is
5014 because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement
5015 even when inside single quotes.
5016 The <NL> character is also escaped. With a |non-zero-arg|
5017 {special} and 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
5018 escaped a second time.
5019 Example of use with a |:!| command: >
5020 :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1)
5021 < This results in a directory listing for the file under the
5022 cursor. Example of use with |system()|: >
5023 :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))
5026 simplify({filename}) *simplify()*
5027 Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
5028 the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
5029 Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in
5030 {filename} designates the current directory, this will be
5031 valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is
5032 not removed either.
5033 Example: >
5034 simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/"
5035 < Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is
5036 a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also
5037 removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same
5038 directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic
5039 links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|.
5042 sin({expr}) *sin()*
5043 Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
5044 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
5045 Examples: >
5046 :echo sin(100)
5047 < -0.506366 >
5048 :echo sin(-4.01)
5049 < 0.763301
5050 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
5053 sort({list} [, {func}]) *sort()* *E702*
5054 Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}. If you
5055 want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
5056 :let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
5057 < Uses the string representation of each item to sort on.
5058 Numbers sort after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers.
5059 For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|.
5060 When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored.
5061 When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
5062 is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two
5063 items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
5064 bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or
5065 smaller if the first one sorts before the second one.
5066 Example: >
5067 func MyCompare(i1, i2)
5068 return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
5069 endfunc
5070 let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare")
5071 < A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which
5072 ignores overflow: >
5073 func MyCompare(i1, i2)
5074 return a:i1 - a:i2
5075 endfunc
5076 <
5077 *soundfold()*
5078 soundfold({word})
5079 Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first
5080 language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports
5081 soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is
5082 possible the {word} is returned unmodified.
5083 This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that
5084 the method can be quite slow.
5086 *spellbadword()*
5087 spellbadword([{sentence}])
5088 Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under
5089 or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the
5090 bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the
5091 result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move.
5093 With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that
5094 is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the
5095 result is an empty string.
5097 The return value is a list with two items:
5098 - The badly spelled word or an empty string.
5099 - The type of the spelling error:
5100 "bad" spelling mistake
5101 "rare" rare word
5102 "local" word only valid in another region
5103 "caps" word should start with Capital
5104 Example: >
5105 echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox")
5106 < ['quik', 'bad'] ~
5108 The spelling information for the current window is used. The
5109 'spell' option must be set and the value of 'spelllang' is
5110 used.
5112 *spellsuggest()*
5113 spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
5114 Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}.
5115 When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are
5116 returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned.
5118 When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only
5119 suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this
5120 after a match with 'spellcapcheck'.
5122 {word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text.
5123 This allows for joining two words that were split. The
5124 suggestions also include the following text, thus you can
5125 replace a line.
5127 {word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be
5128 returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions,
5129 although it may appear capitalized.
5131 The spelling information for the current window is used. The
5132 'spell' option must be set and the values of 'spelllang' and
5133 'spellsuggest' are used.
5136 split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()*
5137 Make a |List| out of {expr}. When {pattern} is omitted or
5138 empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
5139 item.
5140 Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
5141 removing the matched characters.
5142 When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
5143 {keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
5144 Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
5145 character or when {keepempty} is non-zero.
5146 Example: >
5147 :let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
5148 < To split a string in individual characters: >
5149 :for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
5150 < If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs': >
5151 :echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
5152 < ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
5153 Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
5154 :let items = split(line, ':', 1)
5155 < The opposite function is |join()|.
5158 sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()*
5159 Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a
5160 |Float|.
5161 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr}
5162 is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number).
5163 Examples: >
5164 :echo sqrt(100)
5165 < 10.0 >
5166 :echo sqrt(-4.01)
5167 < nan
5168 "nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries.
5169 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
5172 str2float( {expr}) *str2float()*
5173 Convert String {expr} to a Float. This mostly works the same
5174 as when using a floating point number in an expression, see
5175 |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive.
5176 E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to
5177 write "1.0e40".
5178 Text after the number is silently ignored.
5179 The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is
5180 set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to
5181 12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with
5182 |substitute()|: >
5183 let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g'))
5184 < {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
5187 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) *str2nr()*
5188 Convert string {expr} to a number.
5189 {base} is the conversion base, it can be 8, 10 or 16.
5190 When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that
5191 a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
5192 with the default String to Number conversion.
5193 When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a
5194 different base the result will be zero.
5195 Text after the number is silently ignored.
5198 strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()*
5199 The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
5200 specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used,
5201 or the current time if no time is given. The accepted
5202 {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable!
5203 See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the
5204 format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters.
5205 See also |localtime()| and |getftime()|.
5206 The language can be changed with the |:language| command.
5207 Examples: >
5208 :echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997
5209 :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25
5210 :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55
5211 :echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55
5212 :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c"))
5213 Show mod time of file.c.
5214 < Not available on all systems. To check use: >
5215 :if exists("*strftime")
5217 stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()*
5218 The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
5219 {haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}.
5220 If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}.
5221 This can be used to find a second match: >
5222 :let comma1 = stridx(line, ",")
5223 :let comma2 = stridx(line, ",", comma1 + 1)
5224 < The search is done case-sensitive.
5225 For pattern searches use |match()|.
5226 -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
5227 See also |strridx()|.
5228 Examples: >
5229 :echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3
5230 :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0
5231 :echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1
5232 < *strstr()* *strchr()*
5233 stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used
5234 with a single character it works similar to strchr().
5236 *string()*
5237 string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number,
5238 Float, String or a composition of them, then the result can be
5239 parsed back with |eval()|.
5240 {expr} type result ~
5241 String 'string'
5242 Number 123
5243 Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8
5244 Funcref function('name')
5245 List [item, item]
5246 Dictionary {key: value, key: value}
5247 Note that in String values the ' character is doubled.
5248 Also see |strtrans()|.
5250 *strlen()*
5251 strlen({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
5252 {expr} in bytes.
5253 If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters (not
5254 counting composing characters) use something like this: >
5256 :let len = strlen(substitute(str, ".", "x", "g"))
5257 <
5258 If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
5259 For other types an error is given.
5260 Also see |len()|.
5262 strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}]) *strpart()*
5263 The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
5264 byte {start}, with the byte length {len}.
5265 When non-existing bytes are included, this doesn't result in
5266 an error, the bytes are simply omitted.
5267 If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the
5268 end of the {src}. >
5269 strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de"
5270 strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab"
5271 strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg"
5272 strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg"
5273 < Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For
5274 example, to get three bytes under and after the cursor: >
5275 strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 3)
5276 <
5277 strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()*
5278 The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
5279 {haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}.
5280 When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are
5281 ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous
5282 match: >
5283 :let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",")
5284 :let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1)
5285 < The search is done case-sensitive.
5286 For pattern searches use |match()|.
5287 -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
5288 If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned.
5289 See also |stridx()|. Examples: >
5290 :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3
5291 < *strrchr()*
5292 When used with a single character it works similar to the C
5293 function strrchr().
5295 strtrans({expr}) *strtrans()*
5296 The result is a String, which is {expr} with all unprintable
5297 characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|.
5298 Like they are shown in a window. Example: >
5299 echo strtrans(@a)
5300 < This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of
5301 starting a new line.
5303 submatch({nr}) *submatch()*
5304 Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command. Returns
5305 the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr} is 0
5306 the whole matched text is returned.
5307 Example: >
5308 :s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/
5309 < This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it.
5310 A line break is included as a newline character.
5312 substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()*
5313 The result is a String, which is a copy of {expr}, in which
5314 the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}. This works
5315 like the ":substitute" command (without any flags). But the
5316 matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic' option is
5317 set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts portable).
5318 'ignorecase' is still relevant. 'smartcase' is not used.
5319 See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
5320 And a "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
5321 Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
5322 |sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with
5323 "\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'.
5324 When {pat} does not match in {expr}, {expr} is returned
5325 unmodified.
5326 When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {expr} are
5327 replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "".
5328 Example: >
5329 :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "")
5330 < This removes the last component of the 'path' option. >
5331 :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "")
5332 < results in "TESTING".
5334 synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()*
5335 The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position
5336 {lnum} and {col} in the current window.
5337 The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and
5338 |synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text.
5340 {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
5341 line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
5343 When {trans} is non-zero, transparent items are reduced to the
5344 item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know
5345 the effective color. When {trans} is zero, the transparent
5346 item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which
5347 syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens).
5348 Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is
5349 obtained by going through the file in forward direction.
5351 Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): >
5352 :echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name")
5353 <
5354 synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()*
5355 The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of
5356 syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information
5357 about a syntax item.
5358 {mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes
5359 for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is
5360 used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are
5361 used (GUI, cterm or term).
5362 Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups.
5363 {what} result
5364 "name" the name of the syntax item
5365 "fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set
5366 the color, cterm: color number as a string,
5367 term: empty string)
5368 "bg" background color (as with "fg")
5369 "sp" special color (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp|
5370 "fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is
5371 running the name in "#RRGGBB" form
5372 "bg#" like "fg#" for "bg"
5373 "sp#" like "fg#" for "sp"
5374 "bold" "1" if bold
5375 "italic" "1" if italic
5376 "reverse" "1" if reverse
5377 "inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse)
5378 "underline" "1" if underlined
5379 "undercurl" "1" if undercurled
5381 Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the
5382 cursor): >
5383 :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg")
5384 <
5385 synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()*
5386 The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of
5387 {synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to
5388 highlight the character. Highlight links given with
5389 ":highlight link" are followed.
5391 synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()*
5392 Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the
5393 position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. Each item in
5394 the List is an ID like what |synID()| returns.
5395 The first item in the List is the outer region, following are
5396 items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()|
5397 returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a
5398 transparent item.
5399 This function is useful for debugging a syntax file.
5400 Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: >
5401 for id in synstack(line("."), col("."))
5402 echo synIDattr(id, "name")
5403 endfor
5405 system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677*
5406 Get the output of the shell command {expr}.
5407 When {input} is given, this string is written to a file and
5408 passed as stdin to the command. The string is written as-is,
5409 you need to take care of using the correct line separators
5410 yourself. Pipes are not used.
5411 Note: Use |shellescape()| to escape special characters in a
5412 command argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to
5413 fail. The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may
5414 also cause trouble.
5415 This is not to be used for interactive commands.
5417 The result is a String. Example: >
5418 :let files = system("ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h')))
5420 < To make the result more system-independent, the shell output
5421 is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and
5422 <CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems.
5423 The command executed is constructed using several options:
5424 'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote'
5425 ({tmp} is an automatically generated file name).
5426 For Unix and OS/2 braces are put around {expr} to allow for
5427 concatenated commands.
5429 The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a
5430 CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least).
5432 The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|.
5433 This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
5435 Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may
5436 make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail
5437 when using a security agent application.
5438 Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files.
5439 Use |:checktime| to force a check.
5442 tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()*
5443 The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the
5444 buffer associated with each window in the current tab page.
5445 {arg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. When
5446 omitted the current tab page is used.
5447 When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
5448 To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
5449 tablist = []
5450 for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
5451 call extend(tablist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
5452 endfor
5453 < Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.
5456 tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()*
5457 The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
5458 tab page. The first tab page has number 1.
5459 When the optional argument is "$", the number of the last tab
5460 page is returned (the tab page count).
5461 The number can be used with the |:tab| command.
5464 tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()*
5465 Like |winnr()| but for tab page {arg}.
5466 {tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
5467 {arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
5468 - When omitted the current window number is returned. This is
5469 the window which will be used when going to this tab page.
5470 - When "$" the number of windows is returned.
5471 - When "#" the previous window nr is returned.
5472 Useful examples: >
5473 tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1
5474 tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4
5475 < When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned.
5477 *tagfiles()*
5478 tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
5479 for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded.
5482 taglist({expr}) *taglist()*
5483 Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
5484 Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
5485 entries:
5486 name Name of the tag.
5487 filename Name of the file where the tag is
5488 defined. It is either relative to the
5489 current directory or a full path.
5490 cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in
5491 the file.
5492 kind Type of the tag. The value for this
5493 entry depends on the language specific
5494 kind values. Only available when
5495 using a tags file generated by
5496 Exuberant ctags or hdrtag.
5497 static A file specific tag. Refer to
5498 |static-tag| for more information.
5499 More entries may be present, depending on the content of the
5500 tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature.
5501 Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these
5502 fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum"
5503 may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is
5504 contained in.
5506 The ex-command 'cmd' can be either an ex search pattern, a
5507 line number or a line number followed by a byte number.
5509 If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned.
5511 To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be
5512 used in {expr}. Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information
5513 about the tag search regular expression pattern.
5515 Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is
5516 located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of
5517 the tags file generated by the different ctags tools.
5519 tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name*
5520 The result is a String, which is the name of a file that
5521 doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name
5522 is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: >
5523 :let tmpfile = tempname()
5524 :exe "redir > " . tmpfile
5525 < For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|.
5526 For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
5527 option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'.
5529 tolower({expr}) *tolower()*
5530 The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
5531 characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
5532 the string).
5534 toupper({expr}) *toupper()*
5535 The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase
5536 characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to
5537 the string).
5539 tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()*
5540 The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters
5541 which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that
5542 position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in
5543 {fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr}
5544 and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command.
5545 This code also deals with multibyte characters properly.
5547 Examples: >
5548 echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT")
5549 < returns "Hello THere" >
5550 echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}")
5551 < returns "{blob}"
5553 trunc({expr}) *trunc()*
5554 Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or
5555 equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero).
5556 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
5557 Examples: >
5558 echo trunc(1.456)
5559 < 1.0 >
5560 echo trunc(-5.456)
5561 < -5.0 >
5562 echo trunc(4.0)
5563 < 4.0
5564 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
5566 *type()*
5567 type({expr}) The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}:
5568 Number: 0
5569 String: 1
5570 Funcref: 2
5571 List: 3
5572 Dictionary: 4
5573 Float: 5
5574 To avoid the magic numbers it should be used this way: >
5575 :if type(myvar) == type(0)
5576 :if type(myvar) == type("")
5577 :if type(myvar) == type(function("tr"))
5578 :if type(myvar) == type([])
5579 :if type(myvar) == type({})
5580 :if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
5582 values({dict}) *values()*
5583 Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is
5584 in arbitrary order.
5587 virtcol({expr}) *virtcol()*
5588 The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file
5589 position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position
5590 occupied by the character at that position, when the screen
5591 would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the
5592 position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
5593 the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
5594 set to 8, it returns 8.
5595 For the byte position use |col()|.
5596 For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
5597 When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where
5598 "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
5599 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
5600 character.
5601 When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position
5602 beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'|
5603 The accepted positions are:
5604 . the cursor position
5605 $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the
5606 number of displayed characters in the cursor line
5607 plus one)
5608 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
5609 returned)
5610 Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
5611 Examples: >
5612 virtcol(".") with text "foo^Lbar", with cursor on the "^L", returns 5
5613 virtcol("$") with text "foo^Lbar", returns 9
5614 virtcol("'t") with text " there", with 't at 'h', returns 6
5615 < The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error.
5616 A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of
5617 all lines: >
5618 echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])"))
5621 visualmode([expr]) *visualmode()*
5622 The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode
5623 used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty
5624 string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v",
5625 "V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for
5626 character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode
5627 respectively.
5628 Example: >
5629 :exe "normal " . visualmode()
5630 < This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful
5631 in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the
5632 Visual mode that was used.
5633 If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode
5634 (e.g., in a |:vmap|).
5635 *non-zero-arg*
5636 If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
5637 a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and
5638 the old value is returned. Note that " " and "0" are also
5639 non-empty strings, thus cause the mode to be cleared. A List,
5640 Dictionary or Float is not a Number or String, thus does not
5641 cause the mode to be cleared.
5643 *winbufnr()*
5644 winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
5645 associated with window {nr}. When {nr} is zero, the number of
5646 the buffer in the current window is returned. When window
5647 {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
5648 Example: >
5649 :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0))
5650 <
5651 *wincol()*
5652 wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the
5653 cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the
5654 left side of the window. The leftmost column is one.
5656 winheight({nr}) *winheight()*
5657 The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}.
5658 When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is
5659 returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
5660 An existing window always has a height of zero or more.
5661 Examples: >
5662 :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines."
5663 <
5664 *winline()*
5665 winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
5666 in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of
5667 the window. The first line is one.
5668 If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated
5669 first, this may cause a scroll.
5671 *winnr()*
5672 winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
5673 window. The top window has number 1.
5674 When the optional argument is "$", the number of the
5675 last window is returned (the window count).
5676 When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
5677 accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to).
5678 If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0
5679 is returned.
5680 The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
5681 |:wincmd|.
5682 Also see |tabpagewinnr()|.
5684 *winrestcmd()*
5685 winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
5686 the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows
5687 are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is
5688 unchanged.
5689 Example: >
5690 :let cmd = winrestcmd()
5691 :call MessWithWindowSizes()
5692 :exe cmd
5693 <
5694 *winrestview()*
5695 winrestview({dict})
5696 Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
5697 the view of the current window.
5698 If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
5699 If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
5701 *winsaveview()*
5702 winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
5703 the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to
5704 restore the view.
5705 This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the
5706 buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
5707 This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable'
5708 option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
5709 not opened when moving around.
5710 The return value includes:
5711 lnum cursor line number
5712 col cursor column
5713 coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
5714 curswant column for vertical movement
5715 topline first line in the window
5716 topfill filler lines, only in diff mode
5717 leftcol first column displayed
5718 skipcol columns skipped
5719 Note that no option values are saved.
5722 winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()*
5723 The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}.
5724 When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is
5725 returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
5726 An existing window always has a width of zero or more.
5727 Examples: >
5728 :echo "The current window has " . winwidth(0) . " columns."
5729 :if winwidth(0) <= 50
5730 : exe "normal 50\<C-W>|"
5731 :endif
5732 <
5733 *writefile()*
5734 writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
5735 Write |List| {list} to file {fname}. Each list item is
5736 separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String or
5737 Number.
5738 When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used: There will
5739 not be a NL after the last list item. An empty item at the
5740 end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL.
5741 All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character.
5742 Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list}
5743 to writefile().
5744 An existing file is overwritten, if possible.
5745 When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an
5746 error message if the file can't be created or when writing
5747 fails.
5748 Also see |readfile()|.
5749 To copy a file byte for byte: >
5750 :let fl = readfile("foo", "b")
5751 :call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b")
5752 <
5754 *feature-list*
5755 There are three types of features:
5756 1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
5757 was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: >
5758 :if has("cindent")
5759 2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met.
5760 Example: >
5761 :if has("gui_running")
5762 < *has-patch*
5763 3. Included patches. First check |v:version| for the version of Vim.
5764 Then the "patch123" feature means that patch 123 has been included for
5765 this version. Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): >
5766 :if v:version > 602 || v:version == 602 && has("patch148")
5767 < Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is
5768 included.
5770 all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled.
5771 amiga Amiga version of Vim.
5772 arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|.
5773 arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga).
5774 autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. |autocommand|
5775 balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support.
5776 balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons.
5777 beos BeOS version of Vim.
5778 browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
5779 work.
5780 builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals.
5781 byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
5782 cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support.
5783 clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|.
5784 clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support.
5785 cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support.
5786 cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support.
5787 cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support.
5788 comments Compiled with |'comments'| support.
5789 cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|.
5790 cscope Compiled with |cscope| support.
5791 compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible.
5792 debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined.
5793 dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support.
5794 dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support.
5795 diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support.
5796 digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs.
5797 dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|.
5798 dos32 32 bits DOS (DJGPP) version of Vim.
5799 dos16 16 bits DOS version of Vim.
5800 ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set.
5801 emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags.
5802 eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always
5803 true, of course!
5804 ex_extra Compiled with extra Ex commands |+ex_extra|.
5805 extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and
5806 |'hlsearch'|
5807 farsi Compiled with Farsi support |farsi|.
5808 file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>|
5809 filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell
5810 read/write/filter commands
5811 find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches
5812 |+find_in_path|.
5813 float Compiled with support for |Float|.
5814 fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga, MS-DOS, and
5815 Windows this is not present).
5816 folding Compiled with |folding| support.
5817 footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer|
5818 fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system().
5819 fullscreen Compiled with 'fullscreen' support.
5820 gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang|
5821 gui Compiled with GUI enabled.
5822 gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI.
5823 gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
5824 gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
5825 gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined).
5826 gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI (Carbon).
5827 gui_macvim Compiled with MacVim GUI.
5828 gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI.
5829 gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI.
5830 gui_win32 Compiled with MS Windows Win32 GUI.
5831 gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1)
5832 gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon.
5833 hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul|
5834 iconv Can use iconv() for conversion.
5835 insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in
5836 Insert mode.
5837 jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support.
5838 keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support.
5839 langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support.
5840 libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support.
5841 linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat' and 'showbreak'
5842 support.
5843 lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
5844 listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
5845 and the argument list |arglist|.
5846 localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local|
5847 mac Macintosh version of Vim.
5848 macunix Macintosh version of Vim, using Unix files (OS-X).
5849 menu Compiled with support for |:menu|.
5850 mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|.
5851 modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers|
5852 mouse Compiled with support mouse.
5853 mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
5854 mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse.
5855 mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
5856 mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
5857 mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
5858 mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
5859 mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
5860 multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding'
5861 multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding.
5862 multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method.
5863 multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages.
5864 mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|.
5865 netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|.
5866 netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and it's used.
5867 odbeditor Compiled with |odbeditor| support.
5868 ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32.
5869 os2 OS/2 version of Vim.
5870 osfiletype Compiled with support for osfiletypes |+osfiletype|
5871 path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
5872 perl Compiled with Perl interface.
5873 postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing.
5874 printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support.
5875 profile Compiled with |:profile| support.
5876 python Compiled with Python interface.
5877 qnx QNX version of Vim.
5878 quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support.
5879 reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support.
5880 rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support.
5881 ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|.
5882 scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support.
5883 showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support.
5884 signs Compiled with |:sign| support.
5885 smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support.
5886 sniff Compiled with SNiFF interface support.
5887 statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
5888 and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'.
5889 sun_workshop Compiled with support for Sun |workshop|.
5890 spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
5891 syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|.
5892 syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the
5893 current buffer.
5894 system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec().
5895 tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files
5896 |tag-binary-search|.
5897 tag_old_static Compiled with support for old static tags
5898 |tag-old-static|.
5899 tag_any_white Compiled with support for any white characters in tags
5900 files |tag-any-white|.
5901 tcl Compiled with Tcl interface.
5902 terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap.
5903 termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
5904 textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
5905 tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap
5906 or terminfo file.
5907 title Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
5908 toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
5909 transparency Compiled with 'transparency' support.
5910 unix Unix version of Vim.
5911 user_commands User-defined commands.
5912 viminfo Compiled with viminfo support.
5913 vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place.
5914 vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
5915 virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option.
5916 visual Compiled with Visual mode.
5917 visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands.
5918 |blockwise-operators|.
5919 vms VMS version of Vim.
5920 vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands.
5921 wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option.
5922 wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option.
5923 windows Compiled with support for more than one window.
5924 winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option.
5925 win16 Win16 version of Vim (MS-Windows 3.1).
5926 win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP).
5927 win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit).
5928 win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin)
5929 win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME.
5930 writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on.
5931 xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|.
5932 xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|.
5933 xsmp Compiled with X session management support.
5934 xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support.
5935 xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard.
5936 xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the
5937 xterm screen.
5938 x11 Compiled with X11 support.
5940 *string-match*
5941 Matching a pattern in a String
5943 A regexp pattern as explained at |pattern| is normally used to find a match in
5944 the buffer lines. When a pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost
5945 everything works in the same way. The difference is that a String is handled
5946 like it is one line. When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a
5947 line break for the pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or
5948 with ".". Example: >
5949 :let a = "aaaa\nxxxx"
5950 :echo matchstr(a, "..\n..")
5951 aa
5952 xx
5953 :echo matchstr(a, "a.x")
5954 a
5955 x
5957 Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and
5958 "$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a
5959 "\n".
5961 ==============================================================================
5962 5. Defining functions *user-functions*
5964 New functions can be defined. These can be called just like builtin
5965 functions. The function executes a sequence of Ex commands. Normal mode
5966 commands can be executed with the |:normal| command.
5968 The function name must start with an uppercase letter, to avoid confusion with
5969 builtin functions. To prevent from using the same name in different scripts
5970 avoid obvious, short names. A good habit is to start the function name with
5971 the name of the script, e.g., "HTMLcolor()".
5973 It's also possible to use curly braces, see |curly-braces-names|. And the
5974 |autoload| facility is useful to define a function only when it's called.
5976 *local-function*
5977 A function local to a script must start with "s:". A local script function
5978 can only be called from within the script and from functions, user commands
5979 and autocommands defined in the script. It is also possible to call the
5980 function from a mapping defined in the script, but then |<SID>| must be used
5981 instead of "s:" when the mapping is expanded outside of the script.
5983 *:fu* *:function* *E128* *E129* *E123*
5984 :fu[nction] List all functions and their arguments.
5986 :fu[nction] {name} List function {name}.
5987 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
5988 |Funcref|: >
5989 :function dict.init
5991 :fu[nction] /{pattern} List functions with a name matching {pattern}.
5992 Example that lists all functions ending with "File": >
5993 :function /File$
5994 <
5995 *:function-verbose*
5996 When 'verbose' is non-zero, listing a function will also display where it was
5997 last defined. Example: >
5999 :verbose function SetFileTypeSH
6000 function SetFileTypeSH(name)
6001 Last set from /usr/share/vim/vim-7.0/filetype.vim
6002 <
6003 See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
6005 *E124* *E125*
6006 :fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict]
6007 Define a new function by the name {name}. The name
6008 must be made of alphanumeric characters and '_', and
6009 must start with a capital or "s:" (see above).
6011 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
6012 |Funcref|: >
6013 :function dict.init(arg)
6014 < "dict" must be an existing dictionary. The entry
6015 "init" is added if it didn't exist yet. Otherwise [!]
6016 is required to overwrite an existing function. The
6017 result is a |Funcref| to a numbered function. The
6018 function can only be used with a |Funcref| and will be
6019 deleted if there are no more references to it.
6020 *E127* *E122*
6021 When a function by this name already exists and [!] is
6022 not used an error message is given. When [!] is used,
6023 an existing function is silently replaced. Unless it
6024 is currently being executed, that is an error.
6026 For the {arguments} see |function-argument|.
6028 *a:firstline* *a:lastline*
6029 When the [range] argument is added, the function is
6030 expected to take care of a range itself. The range is
6031 passed as "a:firstline" and "a:lastline". If [range]
6032 is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for
6033 each line in the range, with the cursor on the start
6034 of each line. See |function-range-example|.
6036 When the [abort] argument is added, the function will
6037 abort as soon as an error is detected.
6039 When the [dict] argument is added, the function must
6040 be invoked through an entry in a |Dictionary|. The
6041 local variable "self" will then be set to the
6042 dictionary. See |Dictionary-function|.
6044 *function-search-undo*
6045 The last used search pattern and the redo command "."
6046 will not be changed by the function. This also
6047 implies that the effect of |:nohlsearch| is undone
6048 when the function returns.
6050 *:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193*
6051 :endf[unction] The end of a function definition. Must be on a line
6052 by its own, without other commands.
6054 *:delf* *:delfunction* *E130* *E131*
6055 :delf[unction] {name} Delete function {name}.
6056 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
6057 |Funcref|: >
6058 :delfunc dict.init
6059 < This will remove the "init" entry from "dict". The
6060 function is deleted if there are no more references to
6061 it.
6062 *:retu* *:return* *E133*
6063 :retu[rn] [expr] Return from a function. When "[expr]" is given, it is
6064 evaluated and returned as the result of the function.
6065 If "[expr]" is not given, the number 0 is returned.
6066 When a function ends without an explicit ":return",
6067 the number 0 is returned.
6068 Note that there is no check for unreachable lines,
6069 thus there is no warning if commands follow ":return".
6071 If the ":return" is used after a |:try| but before the
6072 matching |:finally| (if present), the commands
6073 following the ":finally" up to the matching |:endtry|
6074 are executed first. This process applies to all
6075 nested ":try"s inside the function. The function
6076 returns at the outermost ":endtry".
6078 *function-argument* *a:var*
6079 An argument can be defined by giving its name. In the function this can then
6080 be used as "a:name" ("a:" for argument).
6081 *a:0* *a:1* *a:000* *E740* *...*
6082 Up to 20 arguments can be given, separated by commas. After the named
6083 arguments an argument "..." can be specified, which means that more arguments
6084 may optionally be following. In the function the extra arguments can be used
6085 as "a:1", "a:2", etc. "a:0" is set to the number of extra arguments (which
6086 can be 0). "a:000" is set to a |List| that contains these arguments. Note
6087 that "a:1" is the same as "a:000[0]".
6088 *E742*
6089 The a: scope and the variables in it cannot be changed, they are fixed.
6090 However, if a |List| or |Dictionary| is used, you can change their contents.
6091 Thus you can pass a |List| to a function and have the function add an item to
6092 it. If you want to make sure the function cannot change a |List| or
6093 |Dictionary| use |:lockvar|.
6095 When not using "...", the number of arguments in a function call must be equal
6096 to the number of named arguments. When using "...", the number of arguments
6097 may be larger.
6099 It is also possible to define a function without any arguments. You must
6100 still supply the () then. The body of the function follows in the next lines,
6101 until the matching |:endfunction|. It is allowed to define another function
6102 inside a function body.
6104 *local-variables*
6105 Inside a function variables can be used. These are local variables, which
6106 will disappear when the function returns. Global variables need to be
6107 accessed with "g:".
6109 Example: >
6110 :function Table(title, ...)
6111 : echohl Title
6112 : echo a:title
6113 : echohl None
6114 : echo a:0 . " items:"
6115 : for s in a:000
6116 : echon ' ' . s
6117 : endfor
6118 :endfunction
6120 This function can then be called with: >
6121 call Table("Table", "line1", "line2")
6122 call Table("Empty Table")
6124 To return more than one value, return a |List|: >
6125 :function Compute(n1, n2)
6126 : if a:n2 == 0
6127 : return ["fail", 0]
6128 : endif
6129 : return ["ok", a:n1 / a:n2]
6130 :endfunction
6132 This function can then be called with: >
6133 :let [success, div] = Compute(102, 6)
6134 :if success == "ok"
6135 : echo div
6136 :endif
6137 <
6138 *:cal* *:call* *E107* *E117*
6139 :[range]cal[l] {name}([arguments])
6140 Call a function. The name of the function and its arguments
6141 are as specified with |:function|. Up to 20 arguments can be
6142 used. The returned value is discarded.
6143 Without a range and for functions that accept a range, the
6144 function is called once. When a range is given the cursor is
6145 positioned at the start of the first line before executing the
6146 function.
6147 When a range is given and the function doesn't handle it
6148 itself, the function is executed for each line in the range,
6149 with the cursor in the first column of that line. The cursor
6150 is left at the last line (possibly moved by the last function
6151 call). The arguments are re-evaluated for each line. Thus
6152 this works:
6153 *function-range-example* >
6154 :function Mynumber(arg)
6155 : echo line(".") . " " . a:arg
6156 :endfunction
6157 :1,5call Mynumber(getline("."))
6158 <
6159 The "a:firstline" and "a:lastline" are defined anyway, they
6160 can be used to do something different at the start or end of
6161 the range.
6163 Example of a function that handles the range itself: >
6165 :function Cont() range
6166 : execute (a:firstline + 1) . "," . a:lastline . 's/^/\t\\ '
6167 :endfunction
6168 :4,8call Cont()
6169 <
6170 This function inserts the continuation character "\" in front
6171 of all the lines in the range, except the first one.
6173 When the function returns a composite value it can be further
6174 dereferenced, but the range will not be used then. Example: >
6175 :4,8call GetDict().method()
6176 < Here GetDict() gets the range but method() does not.
6178 *E132*
6179 The recursiveness of user functions is restricted with the |'maxfuncdepth'|
6180 option.
6183 AUTOMATICALLY LOADING FUNCTIONS ~
6184 *autoload-functions*
6185 When using many or large functions, it's possible to automatically define them
6186 only when they are used. There are two methods: with an autocommand and with
6187 the "autoload" directory in 'runtimepath'.
6190 Using an autocommand ~
6192 This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.14|.
6194 The autocommand is useful if you have a plugin that is a long Vim script file.
6195 You can define the autocommand and quickly quit the script with |:finish|.
6196 That makes Vim startup faster. The autocommand should then load the same file
6197 again, setting a variable to skip the |:finish| command.
6199 Use the FuncUndefined autocommand event with a pattern that matches the
6200 function(s) to be defined. Example: >
6202 :au FuncUndefined BufNet* source ~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim
6204 The file "~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim" should then define functions that start with
6205 "BufNet". Also see |FuncUndefined|.
6208 Using an autoload script ~
6209 *autoload* *E746*
6210 This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.15|.
6212 Using a script in the "autoload" directory is simpler, but requires using
6213 exactly the right file name. A function that can be autoloaded has a name
6214 like this: >
6216 :call filename#funcname()
6218 When such a function is called, and it is not defined yet, Vim will search the
6219 "autoload" directories in 'runtimepath' for a script file called
6220 "filename.vim". For example "~/.vim/autoload/filename.vim". That file should
6221 then define the function like this: >
6223 function filename#funcname()
6224 echo "Done!"
6225 endfunction
6227 The file name and the name used before the # in the function must match
6228 exactly, and the defined function must have the name exactly as it will be
6229 called.
6231 It is possible to use subdirectories. Every # in the function name works like
6232 a path separator. Thus when calling a function: >
6234 :call foo#bar#func()
6236 Vim will look for the file "autoload/foo/bar.vim" in 'runtimepath'.
6238 This also works when reading a variable that has not been set yet: >
6240 :let l = foo#bar#lvar
6242 However, when the autoload script was already loaded it won't be loaded again
6243 for an unknown variable.
6245 When assigning a value to such a variable nothing special happens. This can
6246 be used to pass settings to the autoload script before it's loaded: >
6248 :let foo#bar#toggle = 1
6249 :call foo#bar#func()
6251 Note that when you make a mistake and call a function that is supposed to be
6252 defined in an autoload script, but the script doesn't actually define the
6253 function, the script will be sourced every time you try to call the function.
6254 And you will get an error message every time.
6256 Also note that if you have two script files, and one calls a function in the
6257 other and vice versa, before the used function is defined, it won't work.
6258 Avoid using the autoload functionality at the toplevel.
6260 Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the
6261 |vimball| utility. Also read the user manual |distribute-script|.
6263 ==============================================================================
6264 6. Curly braces names *curly-braces-names*
6266 Wherever you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name" variable.
6267 This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions wrapped in braces
6268 {} like this: >
6269 my_{adjective}_variable
6271 When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts
6272 that in place of the expression, and re-interprets the whole as a variable
6273 name. So in the above example, if the variable "adjective" was set to
6274 "noisy", then the reference would be to "my_noisy_variable", whereas if
6275 "adjective" was set to "quiet", then it would be to "my_quiet_variable".
6277 One application for this is to create a set of variables governed by an option
6278 value. For example, the statement >
6279 echo my_{&background}_message
6281 would output the contents of "my_dark_message" or "my_light_message" depending
6282 on the current value of 'background'.
6284 You can use multiple brace pairs: >
6285 echo my_{adverb}_{adjective}_message
6286 ..or even nest them: >
6287 echo my_{ad{end_of_word}}_message
6288 where "end_of_word" is either "verb" or "jective".
6290 However, the expression inside the braces must evaluate to a valid single
6291 variable name, e.g. this is invalid: >
6292 :let foo='a + b'
6293 :echo c{foo}d
6294 .. since the result of expansion is "ca + bd", which is not a variable name.
6296 *curly-braces-function-names*
6297 You can call and define functions by an evaluated name in a similar way.
6298 Example: >
6299 :let func_end='whizz'
6300 :call my_func_{func_end}(parameter)
6302 This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
6304 ==============================================================================
6305 7. Commands *expression-commands*
6307 :let {var-name} = {expr1} *:let* *E18*
6308 Set internal variable {var-name} to the result of the
6309 expression {expr1}. The variable will get the type
6310 from the {expr}. If {var-name} didn't exist yet, it
6311 is created.
6313 :let {var-name}[{idx}] = {expr1} *E689*
6314 Set a list item to the result of the expression
6315 {expr1}. {var-name} must refer to a list and {idx}
6316 must be a valid index in that list. For nested list
6317 the index can be repeated.
6318 This cannot be used to add an item to a |List|.
6319 This cannot be used to set a byte in a String. You
6320 can do that like this: >
6321 :let var = var[0:2] . 'X' . var[4:]
6322 <
6323 *E711* *E719*
6324 :let {var-name}[{idx1}:{idx2}] = {expr1} *E708* *E709* *E710*
6325 Set a sequence of items in a |List| to the result of
6326 the expression {expr1}, which must be a list with the
6327 correct number of items.
6328 {idx1} can be omitted, zero is used instead.
6329 {idx2} can be omitted, meaning the end of the list.
6330 When the selected range of items is partly past the
6331 end of the list, items will be added.
6333 *:let+=* *:let-=* *:let.=* *E734*
6334 :let {var} += {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} + {expr1}".
6335 :let {var} -= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} - {expr1}".
6336 :let {var} .= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} . {expr1}".
6337 These fail if {var} was not set yet and when the type
6338 of {var} and {expr1} don't fit the operator.
6341 :let ${env-name} = {expr1} *:let-environment* *:let-$*
6342 Set environment variable {env-name} to the result of
6343 the expression {expr1}. The type is always String.
6344 :let ${env-name} .= {expr1}
6345 Append {expr1} to the environment variable {env-name}.
6346 If the environment variable didn't exist yet this
6347 works like "=".
6349 :let @{reg-name} = {expr1} *:let-register* *:let-@*
6350 Write the result of the expression {expr1} in register
6351 {reg-name}. {reg-name} must be a single letter, and
6352 must be the name of a writable register (see
6353 |registers|). "@@" can be used for the unnamed
6354 register, "@/" for the search pattern.
6355 If the result of {expr1} ends in a <CR> or <NL>, the
6356 register will be linewise, otherwise it will be set to
6357 characterwise.
6358 This can be used to clear the last search pattern: >
6359 :let @/ = ""
6360 < This is different from searching for an empty string,
6361 that would match everywhere.
6363 :let @{reg-name} .= {expr1}
6364 Append {expr1} to register {reg-name}. If the
6365 register was empty it's like setting it to {expr1}.
6367 :let &{option-name} = {expr1} *:let-option* *:let-&*
6368 Set option {option-name} to the result of the
6369 expression {expr1}. A String or Number value is
6370 always converted to the type of the option.
6371 For an option local to a window or buffer the effect
6372 is just like using the |:set| command: both the local
6373 value and the global value are changed.
6374 Example: >
6375 :let &path = &path . ',/usr/local/include'
6377 :let &{option-name} .= {expr1}
6378 For a string option: Append {expr1} to the value.
6379 Does not insert a comma like |:set+=|.
6381 :let &{option-name} += {expr1}
6382 :let &{option-name} -= {expr1}
6383 For a number or boolean option: Add or subtract
6384 {expr1}.
6386 :let &l:{option-name} = {expr1}
6387 :let &l:{option-name} .= {expr1}
6388 :let &l:{option-name} += {expr1}
6389 :let &l:{option-name} -= {expr1}
6390 Like above, but only set the local value of an option
6391 (if there is one). Works like |:setlocal|.
6393 :let &g:{option-name} = {expr1}
6394 :let &g:{option-name} .= {expr1}
6395 :let &g:{option-name} += {expr1}
6396 :let &g:{option-name} -= {expr1}
6397 Like above, but only set the global value of an option
6398 (if there is one). Works like |:setglobal|.
6400 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] = {expr1} *:let-unpack* *E687* *E688*
6401 {expr1} must evaluate to a |List|. The first item in
6402 the list is assigned to {name1}, the second item to
6403 {name2}, etc.
6404 The number of names must match the number of items in
6405 the |List|.
6406 Each name can be one of the items of the ":let"
6407 command as mentioned above.
6408 Example: >
6409 :let [s, item] = GetItem(s)
6410 < Detail: {expr1} is evaluated first, then the
6411 assignments are done in sequence. This matters if
6412 {name2} depends on {name1}. Example: >
6413 :let x = [0, 1]
6414 :let i = 0
6415 :let [i, x[i]] = [1, 2]
6416 :echo x
6417 < The result is [0, 2].
6419 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] .= {expr1}
6420 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] += {expr1}
6421 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] -= {expr1}
6422 Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
6423 |List| item.
6425 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] = {expr1}
6426 Like |:let-unpack| above, but the |List| may have more
6427 items than there are names. A list of the remaining
6428 items is assigned to {lastname}. If there are no
6429 remaining items {lastname} is set to an empty list.
6430 Example: >
6431 :let [a, b; rest] = ["aval", "bval", 3, 4]
6432 <
6433 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] .= {expr1}
6434 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] += {expr1}
6435 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] -= {expr1}
6436 Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
6437 |List| item.
6438 *E106*
6439 :let {var-name} .. List the value of variable {var-name}. Multiple
6440 variable names may be given. Special names recognized
6441 here: *E738*
6442 g: global variables
6443 b: local buffer variables
6444 w: local window variables
6445 t: local tab page variables
6446 s: script-local variables
6447 l: local function variables
6448 v: Vim variables.
6450 :let List the values of all variables. The type of the
6451 variable is indicated before the value:
6452 <nothing> String
6453 # Number
6454 * Funcref
6457 :unl[et][!] {name} ... *:unlet* *:unl* *E108* *E795*
6458 Remove the internal variable {name}. Several variable
6459 names can be given, they are all removed. The name
6460 may also be a |List| or |Dictionary| item.
6461 With [!] no error message is given for non-existing
6462 variables.
6463 One or more items from a |List| can be removed: >
6464 :unlet list[3] " remove fourth item
6465 :unlet list[3:] " remove fourth item to last
6466 < One item from a |Dictionary| can be removed at a time: >
6467 :unlet dict['two']
6468 :unlet dict.two
6469 < This is especially useful to clean up used global
6470 variables and script-local variables (these are not
6471 deleted when the script ends). Function-local
6472 variables are automatically deleted when the function
6473 ends.
6475 :lockv[ar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:lockvar* *:lockv*
6476 Lock the internal variable {name}. Locking means that
6477 it can no longer be changed (until it is unlocked).
6478 A locked variable can be deleted: >
6479 :lockvar v
6480 :let v = 'asdf' " fails!
6481 :unlet v
6482 < *E741*
6483 If you try to change a locked variable you get an
6484 error message: "E741: Value of {name} is locked"
6486 [depth] is relevant when locking a |List| or
6487 |Dictionary|. It specifies how deep the locking goes:
6488 1 Lock the |List| or |Dictionary| itself,
6489 cannot add or remove items, but can
6490 still change their values.
6491 2 Also lock the values, cannot change
6492 the items. If an item is a |List| or
6493 |Dictionary|, cannot add or remove
6494 items, but can still change the
6495 values.
6496 3 Like 2 but for the |List| /
6497 |Dictionary| in the |List| /
6498 |Dictionary|, one level deeper.
6499 The default [depth] is 2, thus when {name} is a |List|
6500 or |Dictionary| the values cannot be changed.
6501 *E743*
6502 For unlimited depth use [!] and omit [depth].
6503 However, there is a maximum depth of 100 to catch
6504 loops.
6506 Note that when two variables refer to the same |List|
6507 and you lock one of them, the |List| will also be
6508 locked when used through the other variable.
6509 Example: >
6510 :let l = [0, 1, 2, 3]
6511 :let cl = l
6512 :lockvar l
6513 :let cl[1] = 99 " won't work!
6514 < You may want to make a copy of a list to avoid this.
6515 See |deepcopy()|.
6518 :unlo[ckvar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:unlockvar* *:unlo*
6519 Unlock the internal variable {name}. Does the
6520 opposite of |:lockvar|.
6523 :if {expr1} *:if* *:endif* *:en* *E171* *E579* *E580*
6524 :en[dif] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else"
6525 or ":endif" if {expr1} evaluates to non-zero.
6527 From Vim version 4.5 until 5.0, every Ex command in
6528 between the ":if" and ":endif" is ignored. These two
6529 commands were just to allow for future expansions in a
6530 backwards compatible way. Nesting was allowed. Note
6531 that any ":else" or ":elseif" was ignored, the "else"
6532 part was not executed either.
6534 You can use this to remain compatible with older
6535 versions: >
6536 :if version >= 500
6537 : version-5-specific-commands
6538 :endif
6539 < The commands still need to be parsed to find the
6540 "endif". Sometimes an older Vim has a problem with a
6541 new command. For example, ":silent" is recognized as
6542 a ":substitute" command. In that case ":execute" can
6543 avoid problems: >
6544 :if version >= 600
6545 : execute "silent 1,$delete"
6546 :endif
6547 <
6548 NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work
6549 properly in between ":if" and ":endif".
6551 *:else* *:el* *E581* *E583*
6552 :el[se] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else"
6553 or ":endif" if they previously were not being
6554 executed.
6556 *:elseif* *:elsei* *E582* *E584*
6557 :elsei[f] {expr1} Short for ":else" ":if", with the addition that there
6558 is no extra ":endif".
6560 :wh[ile] {expr1} *:while* *:endwhile* *:wh* *:endw*
6561 *E170* *E585* *E588* *E733*
6562 :endw[hile] Repeat the commands between ":while" and ":endwhile",
6563 as long as {expr1} evaluates to non-zero.
6564 When an error is detected from a command inside the
6565 loop, execution continues after the "endwhile".
6566 Example: >
6567 :let lnum = 1
6568 :while lnum <= line("$")
6569 :call FixLine(lnum)
6570 :let lnum = lnum + 1
6571 :endwhile
6572 <
6573 NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work
6574 properly inside a ":while" and ":for" loop.
6576 :for {var} in {list} *:for* *E690* *E732*
6577 :endfo[r] *:endfo* *:endfor*
6578 Repeat the commands between ":for" and ":endfor" for
6579 each item in {list}. Variable {var} is set to the
6580 value of each item.
6581 When an error is detected for a command inside the
6582 loop, execution continues after the "endfor".
6583 Changing {list} inside the loop affects what items are
6584 used. Make a copy if this is unwanted: >
6585 :for item in copy(mylist)
6586 < When not making a copy, Vim stores a reference to the
6587 next item in the list, before executing the commands
6588 with the current item. Thus the current item can be
6589 removed without effect. Removing any later item means
6590 it will not be found. Thus the following example
6591 works (an inefficient way to make a list empty): >
6592 for item in mylist
6593 call remove(mylist, 0)
6594 endfor
6595 < Note that reordering the list (e.g., with sort() or
6596 reverse()) may have unexpected effects.
6597 Note that the type of each list item should be
6598 identical to avoid errors for the type of {var}
6599 changing. Unlet the variable at the end of the loop
6600 to allow multiple item types: >
6601 for item in ["foo", ["bar"]]
6602 echo item
6603 unlet item " E706 without this
6604 endfor
6606 :for [{var1}, {var2}, ...] in {listlist}
6607 :endfo[r]
6608 Like ":for" above, but each item in {listlist} must be
6609 a list, of which each item is assigned to {var1},
6610 {var2}, etc. Example: >
6611 :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 5], [3, 8]]
6612 :echo getline(lnum)[col]
6613 :endfor
6614 <
6615 *:continue* *:con* *E586*
6616 :con[tinue] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, jumps back
6617 to the start of the loop.
6618 If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but
6619 before the matching |:finally| (if present), the
6620 commands following the ":finally" up to the matching
6621 |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to
6622 all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost
6623 ":endtry" then jumps back to the start of the loop.
6625 *:break* *:brea* *E587*
6626 :brea[k] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, skips to
6627 the command after the matching ":endwhile" or
6628 ":endfor".
6629 If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but
6630 before the matching |:finally| (if present), the
6631 commands following the ":finally" up to the matching
6632 |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to
6633 all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost
6634 ":endtry" then jumps to the command after the loop.
6636 :try *:try* *:endt* *:endtry* *E600* *E601* *E602*
6637 :endt[ry] Change the error handling for the commands between
6638 ":try" and ":endtry" including everything being
6639 executed across ":source" commands, function calls,
6640 or autocommand invocations.
6642 When an error or interrupt is detected and there is
6643 a |:finally| command following, execution continues
6644 after the ":finally". Otherwise, or when the
6645 ":endtry" is reached thereafter, the next
6646 (dynamically) surrounding ":try" is checked for
6647 a corresponding ":finally" etc. Then the script
6648 processing is terminated. (Whether a function
6649 definition has an "abort" argument does not matter.)
6650 Example: >
6651 :try | edit too much | finally | echo "cleanup" | endtry
6652 :echo "impossible" " not reached, script terminated above
6653 <
6654 Moreover, an error or interrupt (dynamically) inside
6655 ":try" and ":endtry" is converted to an exception. It
6656 can be caught as if it were thrown by a |:throw|
6657 command (see |:catch|). In this case, the script
6658 processing is not terminated.
6660 The value "Vim:Interrupt" is used for an interrupt
6661 exception. An error in a Vim command is converted
6662 to a value of the form "Vim({command}):{errmsg}",
6663 other errors are converted to a value of the form
6664 "Vim:{errmsg}". {command} is the full command name,
6665 and {errmsg} is the message that is displayed if the
6666 error exception is not caught, always beginning with
6667 the error number.
6668 Examples: >
6669 :try | sleep 100 | catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | endtry
6670 :try | edit | catch /^Vim(edit):E\d\+/ | echo "error" | endtry
6671 <
6672 *:cat* *:catch* *E603* *E604* *E605*
6673 :cat[ch] /{pattern}/ The following commands until the next |:catch|,
6674 |:finally|, or |:endtry| that belongs to the same
6675 |:try| as the ":catch" are executed when an exception
6676 matching {pattern} is being thrown and has not yet
6677 been caught by a previous ":catch". Otherwise, these
6678 commands are skipped.
6679 When {pattern} is omitted all errors are caught.
6680 Examples: >
6681 :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ " catch interrupts (CTRL-C)
6682 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/ " catch all Vim errors
6683 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:/ " catch errors and interrupts
6684 :catch /^Vim(write):/ " catch all errors in :write
6685 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E123/ " catch error E123
6686 :catch /my-exception/ " catch user exception
6687 :catch /.*/ " catch everything
6688 :catch " same as /.*/
6689 <
6690 Another character can be used instead of / around the
6691 {pattern}, so long as it does not have a special
6692 meaning (e.g., '|' or '"') and doesn't occur inside
6693 {pattern}.
6694 NOTE: It is not reliable to ":catch" the TEXT of
6695 an error message because it may vary in different
6696 locales.
6698 *:fina* *:finally* *E606* *E607*
6699 :fina[lly] The following commands until the matching |:endtry|
6700 are executed whenever the part between the matching
6701 |:try| and the ":finally" is left: either by falling
6702 through to the ":finally" or by a |:continue|,
6703 |:break|, |:finish|, or |:return|, or by an error or
6704 interrupt or exception (see |:throw|).
6706 *:th* *:throw* *E608*
6707 :th[row] {expr1} The {expr1} is evaluated and thrown as an exception.
6708 If the ":throw" is used after a |:try| but before the
6709 first corresponding |:catch|, commands are skipped
6710 until the first ":catch" matching {expr1} is reached.
6711 If there is no such ":catch" or if the ":throw" is
6712 used after a ":catch" but before the |:finally|, the
6713 commands following the ":finally" (if present) up to
6714 the matching |:endtry| are executed. If the ":throw"
6715 is after the ":finally", commands up to the ":endtry"
6716 are skipped. At the ":endtry", this process applies
6717 again for the next dynamically surrounding ":try"
6718 (which may be found in a calling function or sourcing
6719 script), until a matching ":catch" has been found.
6720 If the exception is not caught, the command processing
6721 is terminated.
6722 Example: >
6723 :try | throw "oops" | catch /^oo/ | echo "caught" | endtry
6724 <
6726 *:ec* *:echo*
6727 :ec[ho] {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, with a space in between. The
6728 first {expr1} starts on a new line.
6729 Also see |:comment|.
6730 Use "\n" to start a new line. Use "\r" to move the
6731 cursor to the first column.
6732 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
6733 Cannot be followed by a comment.
6734 Example: >
6735 :echo "the value of 'shell' is" &shell
6736 < *:echo-redraw*
6737 A later redraw may make the message disappear again.
6738 And since Vim mostly postpones redrawing until it's
6739 finished with a sequence of commands this happens
6740 quite often. To avoid that a command from before the
6741 ":echo" causes a redraw afterwards (redraws are often
6742 postponed until you type something), force a redraw
6743 with the |:redraw| command. Example: >
6744 :new | redraw | echo "there is a new window"
6745 <
6746 *:echon*
6747 :echon {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, without anything added. Also see
6748 |:comment|.
6749 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
6750 Cannot be followed by a comment.
6751 Example: >
6752 :echon "the value of 'shell' is " &shell
6753 <
6754 Note the difference between using ":echo", which is a
6755 Vim command, and ":!echo", which is an external shell
6756 command: >
6757 :!echo % --> filename
6758 < The arguments of ":!" are expanded, see |:_%|. >
6759 :!echo "%" --> filename or "filename"
6760 < Like the previous example. Whether you see the double
6761 quotes or not depends on your 'shell'. >
6762 :echo % --> nothing
6763 < The '%' is an illegal character in an expression. >
6764 :echo "%" --> %
6765 < This just echoes the '%' character. >
6766 :echo expand("%") --> filename
6767 < This calls the expand() function to expand the '%'.
6769 *:echoh* *:echohl*
6770 :echoh[l] {name} Use the highlight group {name} for the following
6771 |:echo|, |:echon| and |:echomsg| commands. Also used
6772 for the |input()| prompt. Example: >
6773 :echohl WarningMsg | echo "Don't panic!" | echohl None
6774 < Don't forget to set the group back to "None",
6775 otherwise all following echo's will be highlighted.
6777 *:echom* *:echomsg*
6778 :echom[sg] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as a true message, saving the
6779 message in the |message-history|.
6780 Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the
6781 |:echo| command. But unprintable characters are
6782 displayed, not interpreted.
6783 The parsing works slightly different from |:echo|,
6784 more like |:execute|. All the expressions are first
6785 evaluated and concatenated before echoing anything.
6786 The expressions must evaluate to a Number or String, a
6787 Dictionary or List causes an error.
6788 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
6789 Example: >
6790 :echomsg "It's a Zizzer Zazzer Zuzz, as you can plainly see."
6791 < See |:echo-redraw| to avoid the message disappearing
6792 when the screen is redrawn.
6793 *:echoe* *:echoerr*
6794 :echoe[rr] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as an error message, saving the
6795 message in the |message-history|. When used in a
6796 script or function the line number will be added.
6797 Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the
6798 :echo command. When used inside a try conditional,
6799 the message is raised as an error exception instead
6800 (see |try-echoerr|).
6801 Example: >
6802 :echoerr "This script just failed!"
6803 < If you just want a highlighted message use |:echohl|.
6804 And to get a beep: >
6805 :exe "normal \<Esc>"
6806 <
6807 *:exe* *:execute*
6808 :exe[cute] {expr1} .. Executes the string that results from the evaluation
6809 of {expr1} as an Ex command. Multiple arguments are
6810 concatenated, with a space in between. {expr1} is
6811 used as the processed command, command line editing
6812 keys are not recognized.
6813 Cannot be followed by a comment.
6814 Examples: >
6815 :execute "buffer " nextbuf
6816 :execute "normal " count . "w"
6817 <
6818 ":execute" can be used to append a command to commands
6819 that don't accept a '|'. Example: >
6820 :execute '!ls' | echo "theend"
6822 < ":execute" is also a nice way to avoid having to type
6823 control characters in a Vim script for a ":normal"
6824 command: >
6825 :execute "normal ixxx\<Esc>"
6826 < This has an <Esc> character, see |expr-string|.
6828 Be careful to correctly escape special characters in
6829 file names. The |fnameescape()| function can be used
6830 for Vim commands, |shellescape()| for |:!| commands.
6831 Examples: >
6832 :execute "e " . fnameescape(filename)
6833 :execute "!ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'), 1)
6834 <
6835 Note: The executed string may be any command-line, but
6836 you cannot start or end a "while", "for" or "if"
6837 command. Thus this is illegal: >
6838 :execute 'while i > 5'
6839 :execute 'echo "test" | break'
6840 <
6841 It is allowed to have a "while" or "if" command
6842 completely in the executed string: >
6843 :execute 'while i < 5 | echo i | let i = i + 1 | endwhile'
6844 <
6846 *:exe-comment*
6847 ":execute", ":echo" and ":echon" cannot be followed by
6848 a comment directly, because they see the '"' as the
6849 start of a string. But, you can use '|' followed by a
6850 comment. Example: >
6851 :echo "foo" | "this is a comment
6853 ==============================================================================
6854 8. Exception handling *exception-handling*
6856 The Vim script language comprises an exception handling feature. This section
6857 explains how it can be used in a Vim script.
6859 Exceptions may be raised by Vim on an error or on interrupt, see
6860 |catch-errors| and |catch-interrupt|. You can also explicitly throw an
6861 exception by using the ":throw" command, see |throw-catch|.
6864 TRY CONDITIONALS *try-conditionals*
6866 Exceptions can be caught or can cause cleanup code to be executed. You can
6867 use a try conditional to specify catch clauses (that catch exceptions) and/or
6868 a finally clause (to be executed for cleanup).
6869 A try conditional begins with a |:try| command and ends at the matching
6870 |:endtry| command. In between, you can use a |:catch| command to start
6871 a catch clause, or a |:finally| command to start a finally clause. There may
6872 be none or multiple catch clauses, but there is at most one finally clause,
6873 which must not be followed by any catch clauses. The lines before the catch
6874 clauses and the finally clause is called a try block. >
6876 :try
6877 : ...
6878 : ... TRY BLOCK
6879 : ...
6880 :catch /{pattern}/
6881 : ...
6882 : ... CATCH CLAUSE
6883 : ...
6884 :catch /{pattern}/
6885 : ...
6886 : ... CATCH CLAUSE
6887 : ...
6888 :finally
6889 : ...
6890 : ... FINALLY CLAUSE
6891 : ...
6892 :endtry
6894 The try conditional allows to watch code for exceptions and to take the
6895 appropriate actions. Exceptions from the try block may be caught. Exceptions
6896 from the try block and also the catch clauses may cause cleanup actions.
6897 When no exception is thrown during execution of the try block, the control
6898 is transferred to the finally clause, if present. After its execution, the
6899 script continues with the line following the ":endtry".
6900 When an exception occurs during execution of the try block, the remaining
6901 lines in the try block are skipped. The exception is matched against the
6902 patterns specified as arguments to the ":catch" commands. The catch clause
6903 after the first matching ":catch" is taken, other catch clauses are not
6904 executed. The catch clause ends when the next ":catch", ":finally", or
6905 ":endtry" command is reached - whatever is first. Then, the finally clause
6906 (if present) is executed. When the ":endtry" is reached, the script execution
6907 continues in the following line as usual.
6908 When an exception that does not match any of the patterns specified by the
6909 ":catch" commands is thrown in the try block, the exception is not caught by
6910 that try conditional and none of the catch clauses is executed. Only the
6911 finally clause, if present, is taken. The exception pends during execution of
6912 the finally clause. It is resumed at the ":endtry", so that commands after
6913 the ":endtry" are not executed and the exception might be caught elsewhere,
6914 see |try-nesting|.
6915 When during execution of a catch clause another exception is thrown, the
6916 remaining lines in that catch clause are not executed. The new exception is
6917 not matched against the patterns in any of the ":catch" commands of the same
6918 try conditional and none of its catch clauses is taken. If there is, however,
6919 a finally clause, it is executed, and the exception pends during its
6920 execution. The commands following the ":endtry" are not executed. The new
6921 exception might, however, be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|.
6922 When during execution of the finally clause (if present) an exception is
6923 thrown, the remaining lines in the finally clause are skipped. If the finally
6924 clause has been taken because of an exception from the try block or one of the
6925 catch clauses, the original (pending) exception is discarded. The commands
6926 following the ":endtry" are not executed, and the exception from the finally
6927 clause is propagated and can be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|.
6929 The finally clause is also executed, when a ":break" or ":continue" for
6930 a ":while" loop enclosing the complete try conditional is executed from the
6931 try block or a catch clause. Or when a ":return" or ":finish" is executed
6932 from the try block or a catch clause of a try conditional in a function or
6933 sourced script, respectively. The ":break", ":continue", ":return", or
6934 ":finish" pends during execution of the finally clause and is resumed when the
6935 ":endtry" is reached. It is, however, discarded when an exception is thrown
6936 from the finally clause.
6937 When a ":break" or ":continue" for a ":while" loop enclosing the complete
6938 try conditional or when a ":return" or ":finish" is encountered in the finally
6939 clause, the rest of the finally clause is skipped, and the ":break",
6940 ":continue", ":return" or ":finish" is executed as usual. If the finally
6941 clause has been taken because of an exception or an earlier ":break",
6942 ":continue", ":return", or ":finish" from the try block or a catch clause,
6943 this pending exception or command is discarded.
6945 For examples see |throw-catch| and |try-finally|.
6948 NESTING OF TRY CONDITIONALS *try-nesting*
6950 Try conditionals can be nested arbitrarily. That is, a complete try
6951 conditional can be put into the try block, a catch clause, or the finally
6952 clause of another try conditional. If the inner try conditional does not
6953 catch an exception thrown in its try block or throws a new exception from one
6954 of its catch clauses or its finally clause, the outer try conditional is
6955 checked according to the rules above. If the inner try conditional is in the
6956 try block of the outer try conditional, its catch clauses are checked, but
6957 otherwise only the finally clause is executed. It does not matter for
6958 nesting, whether the inner try conditional is directly contained in the outer
6959 one, or whether the outer one sources a script or calls a function containing
6960 the inner try conditional.
6962 When none of the active try conditionals catches an exception, just their
6963 finally clauses are executed. Thereafter, the script processing terminates.
6964 An error message is displayed in case of an uncaught exception explicitly
6965 thrown by a ":throw" command. For uncaught error and interrupt exceptions
6966 implicitly raised by Vim, the error message(s) or interrupt message are shown
6967 as usual.
6969 For examples see |throw-catch|.
6972 EXAMINING EXCEPTION HANDLING CODE *except-examine*
6974 Exception handling code can get tricky. If you are in doubt what happens, set
6975 'verbose' to 13 or use the ":13verbose" command modifier when sourcing your
6976 script file. Then you see when an exception is thrown, discarded, caught, or
6977 finished. When using a verbosity level of at least 14, things pending in
6978 a finally clause are also shown. This information is also given in debug mode
6979 (see |debug-scripts|).
6982 THROWING AND CATCHING EXCEPTIONS *throw-catch*
6984 You can throw any number or string as an exception. Use the |:throw| command
6985 and pass the value to be thrown as argument: >
6986 :throw 4711
6987 :throw "string"
6988 < *throw-expression*
6989 You can also specify an expression argument. The expression is then evaluated
6990 first, and the result is thrown: >
6991 :throw 4705 + strlen("string")
6992 :throw strpart("strings", 0, 6)
6994 An exception might be thrown during evaluation of the argument of the ":throw"
6995 command. Unless it is caught there, the expression evaluation is abandoned.
6996 The ":throw" command then does not throw a new exception.
6997 Example: >
6999 :function! Foo(arg)
7000 : try
7001 : throw a:arg
7002 : catch /foo/
7003 : endtry
7004 : return 1
7005 :endfunction
7006 :
7007 :function! Bar()
7008 : echo "in Bar"
7009 : return 4710
7010 :endfunction
7011 :
7012 :throw Foo("arrgh") + Bar()
7014 This throws "arrgh", and "in Bar" is not displayed since Bar() is not
7015 executed. >
7016 :throw Foo("foo") + Bar()
7017 however displays "in Bar" and throws 4711.
7019 Any other command that takes an expression as argument might also be
7020 abandoned by an (uncaught) exception during the expression evaluation. The
7021 exception is then propagated to the caller of the command.
7022 Example: >
7024 :if Foo("arrgh")
7025 : echo "then"
7026 :else
7027 : echo "else"
7028 :endif
7030 Here neither of "then" or "else" is displayed.
7032 *catch-order*
7033 Exceptions can be caught by a try conditional with one or more |:catch|
7034 commands, see |try-conditionals|. The values to be caught by each ":catch"
7035 command can be specified as a pattern argument. The subsequent catch clause
7036 gets executed when a matching exception is caught.
7037 Example: >
7039 :function! Foo(value)
7040 : try
7041 : throw a:value
7042 : catch /^\d\+$/
7043 : echo "Number thrown"
7044 : catch /.*/
7045 : echo "String thrown"
7046 : endtry
7047 :endfunction
7048 :
7049 :call Foo(0x1267)
7050 :call Foo('string')
7052 The first call to Foo() displays "Number thrown", the second "String thrown".
7053 An exception is matched against the ":catch" commands in the order they are
7054 specified. Only the first match counts. So you should place the more
7055 specific ":catch" first. The following order does not make sense: >
7057 : catch /.*/
7058 : echo "String thrown"
7059 : catch /^\d\+$/
7060 : echo "Number thrown"
7062 The first ":catch" here matches always, so that the second catch clause is
7063 never taken.
7065 *throw-variables*
7066 If you catch an exception by a general pattern, you may access the exact value
7067 in the variable |v:exception|: >
7069 : catch /^\d\+$/
7070 : echo "Number thrown. Value is" v:exception
7072 You may also be interested where an exception was thrown. This is stored in
7073 |v:throwpoint|. Note that "v:exception" and "v:throwpoint" are valid for the
7074 exception most recently caught as long it is not finished.
7075 Example: >
7077 :function! Caught()
7078 : if v:exception != ""
7079 : echo 'Caught "' . v:exception . '" in ' . v:throwpoint
7080 : else
7081 : echo 'Nothing caught'
7082 : endif
7083 :endfunction
7084 :
7085 :function! Foo()
7086 : try
7087 : try
7088 : try
7089 : throw 4711
7090 : finally
7091 : call Caught()
7092 : endtry
7093 : catch /.*/
7094 : call Caught()
7095 : throw "oops"
7096 : endtry
7097 : catch /.*/
7098 : call Caught()
7099 : finally
7100 : call Caught()
7101 : endtry
7102 :endfunction
7103 :
7104 :call Foo()
7106 This displays >
7108 Nothing caught
7109 Caught "4711" in function Foo, line 4
7110 Caught "oops" in function Foo, line 10
7111 Nothing caught
7113 A practical example: The following command ":LineNumber" displays the line
7114 number in the script or function where it has been used: >
7116 :function! LineNumber()
7117 : return substitute(v:throwpoint, '.*\D\(\d\+\).*', '\1', "")
7118 :endfunction
7119 :command! LineNumber try | throw "" | catch | echo LineNumber() | endtry
7120 <
7121 *try-nested*
7122 An exception that is not caught by a try conditional can be caught by
7123 a surrounding try conditional: >
7125 :try
7126 : try
7127 : throw "foo"
7128 : catch /foobar/
7129 : echo "foobar"
7130 : finally
7131 : echo "inner finally"
7132 : endtry
7133 :catch /foo/
7134 : echo "foo"
7135 :endtry
7137 The inner try conditional does not catch the exception, just its finally
7138 clause is executed. The exception is then caught by the outer try
7139 conditional. The example displays "inner finally" and then "foo".
7141 *throw-from-catch*
7142 You can catch an exception and throw a new one to be caught elsewhere from the
7143 catch clause: >
7145 :function! Foo()
7146 : throw "foo"
7147 :endfunction
7148 :
7149 :function! Bar()
7150 : try
7151 : call Foo()
7152 : catch /foo/
7153 : echo "Caught foo, throw bar"
7154 : throw "bar"
7155 : endtry
7156 :endfunction
7157 :
7158 :try
7159 : call Bar()
7160 :catch /.*/
7161 : echo "Caught" v:exception
7162 :endtry
7164 This displays "Caught foo, throw bar" and then "Caught bar".
7166 *rethrow*
7167 There is no real rethrow in the Vim script language, but you may throw
7168 "v:exception" instead: >
7170 :function! Bar()
7171 : try
7172 : call Foo()
7173 : catch /.*/
7174 : echo "Rethrow" v:exception
7175 : throw v:exception
7176 : endtry
7177 :endfunction
7178 < *try-echoerr*
7179 Note that this method cannot be used to "rethrow" Vim error or interrupt
7180 exceptions, because it is not possible to fake Vim internal exceptions.
7181 Trying so causes an error exception. You should throw your own exception
7182 denoting the situation. If you want to cause a Vim error exception containing
7183 the original error exception value, you can use the |:echoerr| command: >
7185 :try
7186 : try
7187 : asdf
7188 : catch /.*/
7189 : echoerr v:exception
7190 : endtry
7191 :catch /.*/
7192 : echo v:exception
7193 :endtry
7195 This code displays
7197 Vim(echoerr):Vim:E492: Not an editor command: asdf ~
7200 CLEANUP CODE *try-finally*
7202 Scripts often change global settings and restore them at their end. If the
7203 user however interrupts the script by pressing CTRL-C, the settings remain in
7204 an inconsistent state. The same may happen to you in the development phase of
7205 a script when an error occurs or you explicitly throw an exception without
7206 catching it. You can solve these problems by using a try conditional with
7207 a finally clause for restoring the settings. Its execution is guaranteed on
7208 normal control flow, on error, on an explicit ":throw", and on interrupt.
7209 (Note that errors and interrupts from inside the try conditional are converted
7210 to exceptions. When not caught, they terminate the script after the finally
7211 clause has been executed.)
7212 Example: >
7214 :try
7215 : let s:saved_ts = &ts
7216 : set ts=17
7217 :
7218 : " Do the hard work here.
7219 :
7220 :finally
7221 : let &ts = s:saved_ts
7222 : unlet s:saved_ts
7223 :endtry
7225 This method should be used locally whenever a function or part of a script
7226 changes global settings which need to be restored on failure or normal exit of
7227 that function or script part.
7229 *break-finally*
7230 Cleanup code works also when the try block or a catch clause is left by
7231 a ":continue", ":break", ":return", or ":finish".
7232 Example: >
7234 :let first = 1
7235 :while 1
7236 : try
7237 : if first
7238 : echo "first"
7239 : let first = 0
7240 : continue
7241 : else
7242 : throw "second"
7243 : endif
7244 : catch /.*/
7245 : echo v:exception
7246 : break
7247 : finally
7248 : echo "cleanup"
7249 : endtry
7250 : echo "still in while"
7251 :endwhile
7252 :echo "end"
7254 This displays "first", "cleanup", "second", "cleanup", and "end". >
7256 :function! Foo()
7257 : try
7258 : return 4711
7259 : finally
7260 : echo "cleanup\n"
7261 : endtry
7262 : echo "Foo still active"
7263 :endfunction
7264 :
7265 :echo Foo() "returned by Foo"
7267 This displays "cleanup" and "4711 returned by Foo". You don't need to add an
7268 extra ":return" in the finally clause. (Above all, this would override the
7269 return value.)
7271 *except-from-finally*
7272 Using either of ":continue", ":break", ":return", ":finish", or ":throw" in
7273 a finally clause is possible, but not recommended since it abandons the
7274 cleanup actions for the try conditional. But, of course, interrupt and error
7275 exceptions might get raised from a finally clause.
7276 Example where an error in the finally clause stops an interrupt from
7277 working correctly: >
7279 :try
7280 : try
7281 : echo "Press CTRL-C for interrupt"
7282 : while 1
7283 : endwhile
7284 : finally
7285 : unlet novar
7286 : endtry
7287 :catch /novar/
7288 :endtry
7289 :echo "Script still running"
7290 :sleep 1
7292 If you need to put commands that could fail into a finally clause, you should
7293 think about catching or ignoring the errors in these commands, see
7294 |catch-errors| and |ignore-errors|.
7297 CATCHING ERRORS *catch-errors*
7299 If you want to catch specific errors, you just have to put the code to be
7300 watched in a try block and add a catch clause for the error message. The
7301 presence of the try conditional causes all errors to be converted to an
7302 exception. No message is displayed and |v:errmsg| is not set then. To find
7303 the right pattern for the ":catch" command, you have to know how the format of
7304 the error exception is.
7305 Error exceptions have the following format: >
7307 Vim({cmdname}):{errmsg}
7308 or >
7309 Vim:{errmsg}
7311 {cmdname} is the name of the command that failed; the second form is used when
7312 the command name is not known. {errmsg} is the error message usually produced
7313 when the error occurs outside try conditionals. It always begins with
7314 a capital "E", followed by a two or three-digit error number, a colon, and
7315 a space.
7317 Examples:
7319 The command >
7320 :unlet novar
7321 normally produces the error message >
7322 E108: No such variable: "novar"
7323 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
7324 Vim(unlet):E108: No such variable: "novar"
7326 The command >
7327 :dwim
7328 normally produces the error message >
7329 E492: Not an editor command: dwim
7330 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
7331 Vim:E492: Not an editor command: dwim
7333 You can catch all ":unlet" errors by a >
7334 :catch /^Vim(unlet):/
7335 or all errors for misspelled command names by a >
7336 :catch /^Vim:E492:/
7338 Some error messages may be produced by different commands: >
7339 :function nofunc
7340 and >
7341 :delfunction nofunc
7342 both produce the error message >
7343 E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
7344 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
7345 Vim(function):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
7346 or >
7347 Vim(delfunction):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
7348 respectively. You can catch the error by its number independently on the
7349 command that caused it if you use the following pattern: >
7350 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E128:/
7352 Some commands like >
7353 :let x = novar
7354 produce multiple error messages, here: >
7355 E121: Undefined variable: novar
7356 E15: Invalid expression: novar
7357 Only the first is used for the exception value, since it is the most specific
7358 one (see |except-several-errors|). So you can catch it by >
7359 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E121:/
7361 You can catch all errors related to the name "nofunc" by >
7362 :catch /\<nofunc\>/
7364 You can catch all Vim errors in the ":write" and ":read" commands by >
7365 :catch /^Vim(\(write\|read\)):E\d\+:/
7367 You can catch all Vim errors by the pattern >
7368 :catch /^Vim\((\a\+)\)\=:E\d\+:/
7369 <
7370 *catch-text*
7371 NOTE: You should never catch the error message text itself: >
7372 :catch /No such variable/
7373 only works in the english locale, but not when the user has selected
7374 a different language by the |:language| command. It is however helpful to
7375 cite the message text in a comment: >
7376 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E108:/ " No such variable
7379 IGNORING ERRORS *ignore-errors*
7381 You can ignore errors in a specific Vim command by catching them locally: >
7383 :try
7384 : write
7385 :catch
7386 :endtry
7388 But you are strongly recommended NOT to use this simple form, since it could
7389 catch more than you want. With the ":write" command, some autocommands could
7390 be executed and cause errors not related to writing, for instance: >
7392 :au BufWritePre * unlet novar
7394 There could even be such errors you are not responsible for as a script
7395 writer: a user of your script might have defined such autocommands. You would
7396 then hide the error from the user.
7397 It is much better to use >
7399 :try
7400 : write
7401 :catch /^Vim(write):/
7402 :endtry
7404 which only catches real write errors. So catch only what you'd like to ignore
7405 intentionally.
7407 For a single command that does not cause execution of autocommands, you could
7408 even suppress the conversion of errors to exceptions by the ":silent!"
7409 command: >
7410 :silent! nunmap k
7411 This works also when a try conditional is active.
7414 CATCHING INTERRUPTS *catch-interrupt*
7416 When there are active try conditionals, an interrupt (CTRL-C) is converted to
7417 the exception "Vim:Interrupt". You can catch it like every exception. The
7418 script is not terminated, then.
7419 Example: >
7421 :function! TASK1()
7422 : sleep 10
7423 :endfunction
7425 :function! TASK2()
7426 : sleep 20
7427 :endfunction
7429 :while 1
7430 : let command = input("Type a command: ")
7431 : try
7432 : if command == ""
7433 : continue
7434 : elseif command == "END"
7435 : break
7436 : elseif command == "TASK1"
7437 : call TASK1()
7438 : elseif command == "TASK2"
7439 : call TASK2()
7440 : else
7441 : echo "\nIllegal command:" command
7442 : continue
7443 : endif
7444 : catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/
7445 : echo "\nCommand interrupted"
7446 : " Caught the interrupt. Continue with next prompt.
7447 : endtry
7448 :endwhile
7450 You can interrupt a task here by pressing CTRL-C; the script then asks for
7451 a new command. If you press CTRL-C at the prompt, the script is terminated.
7453 For testing what happens when CTRL-C would be pressed on a specific line in
7454 your script, use the debug mode and execute the |>quit| or |>interrupt|
7455 command on that line. See |debug-scripts|.
7458 CATCHING ALL *catch-all*
7460 The commands >
7462 :catch /.*/
7463 :catch //
7464 :catch
7466 catch everything, error exceptions, interrupt exceptions and exceptions
7467 explicitly thrown by the |:throw| command. This is useful at the top level of
7468 a script in order to catch unexpected things.
7469 Example: >
7471 :try
7472 :
7473 : " do the hard work here
7474 :
7475 :catch /MyException/
7476 :
7477 : " handle known problem
7478 :
7479 :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/
7480 : echo "Script interrupted"
7481 :catch /.*/
7482 : echo "Internal error (" . v:exception . ")"
7483 : echo " - occurred at " . v:throwpoint
7484 :endtry
7485 :" end of script
7487 Note: Catching all might catch more things than you want. Thus, you are
7488 strongly encouraged to catch only for problems that you can really handle by
7489 specifying a pattern argument to the ":catch".
7490 Example: Catching all could make it nearly impossible to interrupt a script
7491 by pressing CTRL-C: >
7493 :while 1
7494 : try
7495 : sleep 1
7496 : catch
7497 : endtry
7498 :endwhile
7501 EXCEPTIONS AND AUTOCOMMANDS *except-autocmd*
7503 Exceptions may be used during execution of autocommands. Example: >
7505 :autocmd User x try
7506 :autocmd User x throw "Oops!"
7507 :autocmd User x catch
7508 :autocmd User x echo v:exception
7509 :autocmd User x endtry
7510 :autocmd User x throw "Arrgh!"
7511 :autocmd User x echo "Should not be displayed"
7512 :
7513 :try
7514 : doautocmd User x
7515 :catch
7516 : echo v:exception
7517 :endtry
7519 This displays "Oops!" and "Arrgh!".
7521 *except-autocmd-Pre*
7522 For some commands, autocommands get executed before the main action of the
7523 command takes place. If an exception is thrown and not caught in the sequence
7524 of autocommands, the sequence and the command that caused its execution are
7525 abandoned and the exception is propagated to the caller of the command.
7526 Example: >
7528 :autocmd BufWritePre * throw "FAIL"
7529 :autocmd BufWritePre * echo "Should not be displayed"
7530 :
7531 :try
7532 : write
7533 :catch
7534 : echo "Caught:" v:exception "from" v:throwpoint
7535 :endtry
7537 Here, the ":write" command does not write the file currently being edited (as
7538 you can see by checking 'modified'), since the exception from the BufWritePre
7539 autocommand abandons the ":write". The exception is then caught and the
7540 script displays: >
7542 Caught: FAIL from BufWrite Auto commands for "*"
7543 <
7544 *except-autocmd-Post*
7545 For some commands, autocommands get executed after the main action of the
7546 command has taken place. If this main action fails and the command is inside
7547 an active try conditional, the autocommands are skipped and an error exception
7548 is thrown that can be caught by the caller of the command.
7549 Example: >
7551 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "File successfully written!"
7552 :
7553 :try
7554 : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
7555 :catch
7556 : echo v:exception
7557 :endtry
7559 This just displays: >
7561 Vim(write):E212: Can't open file for writing (/i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e)
7563 If you really need to execute the autocommands even when the main action
7564 fails, trigger the event from the catch clause.
7565 Example: >
7567 :autocmd BufWritePre * set noreadonly
7568 :autocmd BufWritePost * set readonly
7569 :
7570 :try
7571 : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
7572 :catch
7573 : doautocmd BufWritePost /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
7574 :endtry
7575 <
7576 You can also use ":silent!": >
7578 :let x = "ok"
7579 :let v:errmsg = ""
7580 :autocmd BufWritePost * if v:errmsg != ""
7581 :autocmd BufWritePost * let x = "after fail"
7582 :autocmd BufWritePost * endif
7583 :try
7584 : silent! write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
7585 :catch
7586 :endtry
7587 :echo x
7589 This displays "after fail".
7591 If the main action of the command does not fail, exceptions from the
7592 autocommands will be catchable by the caller of the command: >
7594 :autocmd BufWritePost * throw ":-("
7595 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "Should not be displayed"
7596 :
7597 :try
7598 : write
7599 :catch
7600 : echo v:exception
7601 :endtry
7602 <
7603 *except-autocmd-Cmd*
7604 For some commands, the normal action can be replaced by a sequence of
7605 autocommands. Exceptions from that sequence will be catchable by the caller
7606 of the command.
7607 Example: For the ":write" command, the caller cannot know whether the file
7608 had actually been written when the exception occurred. You need to tell it in
7609 some way. >
7611 :if !exists("cnt")
7612 : let cnt = 0
7613 :
7614 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if &modified
7615 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * let cnt = cnt + 1
7616 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 2
7617 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError"
7618 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
7619 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * write | set nomodified
7620 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 0
7621 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError"
7622 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
7623 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * echo "File successfully written!"
7624 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
7625 :endif
7626 :
7627 :try
7628 : write
7629 :catch /^BufWriteCmdError$/
7630 : if &modified
7631 : echo "Error on writing (file contents not changed)"
7632 : else
7633 : echo "Error after writing"
7634 : endif
7635 :catch /^Vim(write):/
7636 : echo "Error on writing"
7637 :endtry
7639 When this script is sourced several times after making changes, it displays
7640 first >
7641 File successfully written!
7642 then >
7643 Error on writing (file contents not changed)
7644 then >
7645 Error after writing
7646 etc.
7648 *except-autocmd-ill*
7649 You cannot spread a try conditional over autocommands for different events.
7650 The following code is ill-formed: >
7652 :autocmd BufWritePre * try
7653 :
7654 :autocmd BufWritePost * catch
7655 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo v:exception
7656 :autocmd BufWritePost * endtry
7657 :
7658 :write
7661 EXCEPTION HIERARCHIES AND PARAMETERIZED EXCEPTIONS *except-hier-param*
7663 Some programming languages allow to use hierarchies of exception classes or to
7664 pass additional information with the object of an exception class. You can do
7665 similar things in Vim.
7666 In order to throw an exception from a hierarchy, just throw the complete
7667 class name with the components separated by a colon, for instance throw the
7668 string "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" for an overflow in a mathematical library.
7669 When you want to pass additional information with your exception class, add
7670 it in parentheses, for instance throw the string "EXCEPT:IO:WRITEERR(myfile)"
7671 for an error when writing "myfile".
7672 With the appropriate patterns in the ":catch" command, you can catch for
7673 base classes or derived classes of your hierarchy. Additional information in
7674 parentheses can be cut out from |v:exception| with the ":substitute" command.
7675 Example: >
7677 :function! CheckRange(a, func)
7678 : if a:a < 0
7679 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE(" . a:func . ")"
7680 : endif
7681 :endfunction
7682 :
7683 :function! Add(a, b)
7684 : call CheckRange(a:a, "Add")
7685 : call CheckRange(a:b, "Add")
7686 : let c = a:a + a:b
7687 : if c < 0
7688 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW"
7689 : endif
7690 : return c
7691 :endfunction
7692 :
7693 :function! Div(a, b)
7694 : call CheckRange(a:a, "Div")
7695 : call CheckRange(a:b, "Div")
7696 : if (a:b == 0)
7697 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:ZERODIV"
7698 : endif
7699 : return a:a / a:b
7700 :endfunction
7701 :
7702 :function! Write(file)
7703 : try
7704 : execute "write" fnameescape(a:file)
7705 : catch /^Vim(write):/
7706 : throw "EXCEPT:IO(" . getcwd() . ", " . a:file . "):WRITEERR"
7707 : endtry
7708 :endfunction
7709 :
7710 :try
7711 :
7712 : " something with arithmetics and I/O
7713 :
7714 :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE/
7715 : let function = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(\a\+\)).*', '\1', "")
7716 : echo "Range error in" function
7717 :
7718 :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR/ " catches OVERFLOW and ZERODIV
7719 : echo "Math error"
7720 :
7721 :catch /^EXCEPT:IO/
7722 : let dir = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(.\+\),\s*.\+).*', '\1', "")
7723 : let file = substitute(v:exception, '.*(.\+,\s*\(.\+\)).*', '\1', "")
7724 : if file !~ '^/'
7725 : let file = dir . "/" . file
7726 : endif
7727 : echo 'I/O error for "' . file . '"'
7728 :
7729 :catch /^EXCEPT/
7730 : echo "Unspecified error"
7731 :
7732 :endtry
7734 The exceptions raised by Vim itself (on error or when pressing CTRL-C) use
7735 a flat hierarchy: they are all in the "Vim" class. You cannot throw yourself
7736 exceptions with the "Vim" prefix; they are reserved for Vim.
7737 Vim error exceptions are parameterized with the name of the command that
7738 failed, if known. See |catch-errors|.
7741 PECULIARITIES
7742 *except-compat*
7743 The exception handling concept requires that the command sequence causing the
7744 exception is aborted immediately and control is transferred to finally clauses
7745 and/or a catch clause.
7747 In the Vim script language there are cases where scripts and functions
7748 continue after an error: in functions without the "abort" flag or in a command
7749 after ":silent!", control flow goes to the following line, and outside
7750 functions, control flow goes to the line following the outermost ":endwhile"
7751 or ":endif". On the other hand, errors should be catchable as exceptions
7752 (thus, requiring the immediate abortion).
7754 This problem has been solved by converting errors to exceptions and using
7755 immediate abortion (if not suppressed by ":silent!") only when a try
7756 conditional is active. This is no restriction since an (error) exception can
7757 be caught only from an active try conditional. If you want an immediate
7758 termination without catching the error, just use a try conditional without
7759 catch clause. (You can cause cleanup code being executed before termination
7760 by specifying a finally clause.)
7762 When no try conditional is active, the usual abortion and continuation
7763 behavior is used instead of immediate abortion. This ensures compatibility of
7764 scripts written for Vim 6.1 and earlier.
7766 However, when sourcing an existing script that does not use exception handling
7767 commands (or when calling one of its functions) from inside an active try
7768 conditional of a new script, you might change the control flow of the existing
7769 script on error. You get the immediate abortion on error and can catch the
7770 error in the new script. If however the sourced script suppresses error
7771 messages by using the ":silent!" command (checking for errors by testing
7772 |v:errmsg| if appropriate), its execution path is not changed. The error is
7773 not converted to an exception. (See |:silent|.) So the only remaining cause
7774 where this happens is for scripts that don't care about errors and produce
7775 error messages. You probably won't want to use such code from your new
7776 scripts.
7778 *except-syntax-err*
7779 Syntax errors in the exception handling commands are never caught by any of
7780 the ":catch" commands of the try conditional they belong to. Its finally
7781 clauses, however, is executed.
7782 Example: >
7784 :try
7785 : try
7786 : throw 4711
7787 : catch /\(/
7788 : echo "in catch with syntax error"
7789 : catch
7790 : echo "inner catch-all"
7791 : finally
7792 : echo "inner finally"
7793 : endtry
7794 :catch
7795 : echo 'outer catch-all caught "' . v:exception . '"'
7796 : finally
7797 : echo "outer finally"
7798 :endtry
7800 This displays: >
7801 inner finally
7802 outer catch-all caught "Vim(catch):E54: Unmatched \("
7803 outer finally
7804 The original exception is discarded and an error exception is raised, instead.
7806 *except-single-line*
7807 The ":try", ":catch", ":finally", and ":endtry" commands can be put on
7808 a single line, but then syntax errors may make it difficult to recognize the
7809 "catch" line, thus you better avoid this.
7810 Example: >
7811 :try | unlet! foo # | catch | endtry
7812 raises an error exception for the trailing characters after the ":unlet!"
7813 argument, but does not see the ":catch" and ":endtry" commands, so that the
7814 error exception is discarded and the "E488: Trailing characters" message gets
7815 displayed.
7817 *except-several-errors*
7818 When several errors appear in a single command, the first error message is
7819 usually the most specific one and therefor converted to the error exception.
7820 Example: >
7821 echo novar
7822 causes >
7823 E121: Undefined variable: novar
7824 E15: Invalid expression: novar
7825 The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: >
7826 Vim(echo):E121: Undefined variable: novar
7827 < *except-syntax-error*
7828 But when a syntax error is detected after a normal error in the same command,
7829 the syntax error is used for the exception being thrown.
7830 Example: >
7831 unlet novar #
7832 causes >
7833 E108: No such variable: "novar"
7834 E488: Trailing characters
7835 The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: >
7836 Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters
7837 This is done because the syntax error might change the execution path in a way
7838 not intended by the user. Example: >
7839 try
7840 try | unlet novar # | catch | echo v:exception | endtry
7841 catch /.*/
7842 echo "outer catch:" v:exception
7843 endtry
7844 This displays "outer catch: Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters", and then
7845 a "E600: Missing :endtry" error message is given, see |except-single-line|.
7847 ==============================================================================
7848 9. Examples *eval-examples*
7850 Printing in Binary ~
7851 >
7852 :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the binary string representation of a number.
7853 :func Nr2Bin(nr)
7854 : let n = a:nr
7855 : let r = ""
7856 : while n
7857 : let r = '01'[n % 2] . r
7858 : let n = n / 2
7859 : endwhile
7860 : return r
7861 :endfunc
7863 :" The function String2Bin() converts each character in a string to a
7864 :" binary string, separated with dashes.
7865 :func String2Bin(str)
7866 : let out = ''
7867 : for ix in range(strlen(a:str))
7868 : let out = out . '-' . Nr2Bin(char2nr(a:str[ix]))
7869 : endfor
7870 : return out[1:]
7871 :endfunc
7873 Example of its use: >
7874 :echo Nr2Bin(32)
7875 result: "100000" >
7876 :echo String2Bin("32")
7877 result: "110011-110010"
7880 Sorting lines ~
7882 This example sorts lines with a specific compare function. >
7884 :func SortBuffer()
7885 : let lines = getline(1, '$')
7886 : call sort(lines, function("Strcmp"))
7887 : call setline(1, lines)
7888 :endfunction
7890 As a one-liner: >
7891 :call setline(1, sort(getline(1, '$'), function("Strcmp")))
7894 scanf() replacement ~
7895 *sscanf*
7896 There is no sscanf() function in Vim. If you need to extract parts from a
7897 line, you can use matchstr() and substitute() to do it. This example shows
7898 how to get the file name, line number and column number out of a line like
7899 "foobar.txt, 123, 45". >
7900 :" Set up the match bit
7901 :let mx='\(\f\+\),\s*\(\d\+\),\s*\(\d\+\)'
7902 :"get the part matching the whole expression
7903 :let l = matchstr(line, mx)
7904 :"get each item out of the match
7905 :let file = substitute(l, mx, '\1', '')
7906 :let lnum = substitute(l, mx, '\2', '')
7907 :let col = substitute(l, mx, '\3', '')
7909 The input is in the variable "line", the results in the variables "file",
7910 "lnum" and "col". (idea from Michael Geddes)
7913 getting the scriptnames in a Dictionary ~
7914 *scriptnames-dictionary*
7915 The |:scriptnames| command can be used to get a list of all script files that
7916 have been sourced. There is no equivalent function or variable for this
7917 (because it's rarely needed). In case you need to manipulate the list this
7918 code can be used: >
7919 " Get the output of ":scriptnames" in the scriptnames_output variable.
7920 let scriptnames_output = ''
7921 redir => scriptnames_output
7922 silent scriptnames
7923 redir END
7925 " Split the output into lines and parse each line. Add an entry to the
7926 " "scripts" dictionary.
7927 let scripts = {}
7928 for line in split(scriptnames_output, "\n")
7929 " Only do non-blank lines.
7930 if line =~ '\S'
7931 " Get the first number in the line.
7932 let nr = matchstr(line, '\d\+')
7933 " Get the file name, remove the script number " 123: ".
7934 let name = substitute(line, '.\+:\s*', '', '')
7935 " Add an item to the Dictionary
7936 let scripts[nr] = name
7937 endif
7938 endfor
7939 unlet scriptnames_output
7941 ==============================================================================
7942 10. No +eval feature *no-eval-feature*
7944 When the |+eval| feature was disabled at compile time, none of the expression
7945 evaluation commands are available. To prevent this from causing Vim scripts
7946 to generate all kinds of errors, the ":if" and ":endif" commands are still
7947 recognized, though the argument of the ":if" and everything between the ":if"
7948 and the matching ":endif" is ignored. Nesting of ":if" blocks is allowed, but
7949 only if the commands are at the start of the line. The ":else" command is not
7950 recognized.
7952 Example of how to avoid executing commands when the |+eval| feature is
7953 missing: >
7955 :if 1
7956 : echo "Expression evaluation is compiled in"
7957 :else
7958 : echo "You will _never_ see this message"
7959 :endif
7961 ==============================================================================
7962 11. The sandbox *eval-sandbox* *sandbox* *E48*
7964 The 'foldexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and 'foldtext'
7965 options are evaluated in a sandbox. This means that you are protected from
7966 these expressions having nasty side effects. This gives some safety for when
7967 these options are set from a modeline. It is also used when the command from
7968 a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line.
7969 The sandbox is also used for the |:sandbox| command.
7971 These items are not allowed in the sandbox:
7972 - changing the buffer text
7973 - defining or changing mapping, autocommands, functions, user commands
7974 - setting certain options (see |option-summary|)
7975 - setting certain v: variables (see |v:var|) *E794*
7976 - executing a shell command
7977 - reading or writing a file
7978 - jumping to another buffer or editing a file
7979 - executing Python, Perl, etc. commands
7980 This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks.
7982 *:san* *:sandbox*
7983 :san[dbox] {cmd} Execute {cmd} in the sandbox. Useful to evaluate an
7984 option that may have been set from a modeline, e.g.
7985 'foldexpr'.
7987 *sandbox-option*
7988 A few options contain an expression. When this expression is evaluated it may
7989 have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risk. But the sandbox is
7990 restrictive, thus this only happens when the option was set from an insecure
7991 location. Insecure in this context are:
7992 - sourcing a .vimrc or .exrc in the current directory
7993 - while executing in the sandbox
7994 - value coming from a modeline
7996 Note that when in the sandbox and saving an option value and restoring it, the
7997 option will still be marked as it was set in the sandbox.
7999 ==============================================================================
8000 12. Textlock *textlock*
8002 In a few situations it is not allowed to change the text in the buffer, jump
8003 to another window and some other things that might confuse or break what Vim
8004 is currently doing. This mostly applies to things that happen when Vim is
8005 actually doing something else. For example, evaluating the 'balloonexpr' may
8006 happen any moment the mouse cursor is resting at some position.
8008 This is not allowed when the textlock is active:
8009 - changing the buffer text
8010 - jumping to another buffer or window
8011 - editing another file
8012 - closing a window or quitting Vim
8013 - etc.
8016 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: